Tumgik
#leading you to fall to your death from 600 floors up
Text
If I had a nickel for every time a character named Ethan died in a piece of media I read/watched I'd have two nickels; which isn't a lot but it's weird that it happened twice
28 notes · View notes
ezraspiderwick · 2 years
Text
Whumptober Day 3: Gun to Temple
Tumblr media
Pairing: Javi G x GN!Reader
Word count: 600
Rating: Mature
Warnings: guns, gunshot wounds, threats
MASTERLIST
.
Everything happens way too quickly, the shooting, the screams, the terror that takes over Javi’s usual happy expression. Before you can ask what’s happening he’s already on his feet, putting on his clothes and handing you yours. You stay frozen, your brain trying to process the situation until he kneels next to you and cups your head between his hands. 
“Amor I know everything happening right now may be scary but we need to go. I need you to trust me.” You nod and after you put on your clothes, he takes your hand and guides you through the different passages of the house, until you get to the entrance that leads to the parking lot. 
Javier places the car keys on your hands and a kiss on your cheek, the shouting is getting closer. “You need to get out of here.”
“Javi-”
“I’ll catch up with you, I promise.” There’s a part of you that doesn’t believe him, but still, you nod, not sure what else to do. 
With one last look at your lover who has a sad smile that threatens to break your heart, you head to the car. As the engine turns on, Javi takes out a gun you hadn’t noticed he was carrying and aims it at the inside of the house. 
And then he fires.
And whoever is on the other side fires back. 
The bullet hits his shoulder, the impact making him fall to the floor with a loud thud. The next few seconds, where he is still laying on the floor, give the shooters a chance to get to his side and disarm him. You’re clutching the steering wheel, torn between the need to run to your man or to get away from here as you told him you would. 
One of the men next to Javi spots you and motions to the others in your direction. If you are going to leave, you need to do so now, but you can’t abandon Javi, if the roles were reversed he would never leave you. They approach you, the man in front with a gun aimed in your direction, the other two are holding Javi between them. He is covered in blood and sweat, wincing from the effort of standing up and moving. His face is contorting in pain, but the moment he notices you still there, horror and fear replace it. 
The man stops a few feet away from you. “Why don’t you get out of the car doll?”
Javi shakes his head. “Get out of here.” He says between jaded breaths. He turns to his captors. “It’s me who you want, leave them alone.”
As an answer they punch him in the stomach, causing him to double over in pain, the only thing stopping him from falling to the floor being the people holding his arms. The one who had been talking to you brings his gun against Javi’s temple. “I’ll make the decision easier for you. Either you get out or I pull the trigger and you’ll be responsible for his death.”
As you get out of the car with your hands up, the man keeps the gun against Javi’s temple for a couple of seconds longer than he needs to, enjoying the tension of the moment, before grabbing your arm. “Let’s go, there’s a lot we need to discuss,” he says to Javi as he drags you back to the house, with the others following shortly.
24 notes · View notes
oviids · 4 years
Note
pls share some of your spn fic recs 🥺🥺
ok, a few things first:
followers and mutuals who do not have supernatural brainworms, kindly avert your eyes
i don’t normally rec or even read much fanfic any more but this is a CRISIS ok (cont.)
there is so. much. content for deancas out there and i have incredibly high standards, several ancient ao3 bookmarks, can speedread, and want to spare you guys the experience of wading through it all.
i also have a section for spn femslash since I was pretty into that back in the day (sadly a lot less fan content for this :/)
I don’t really like au’s or pure smut (I honestly usually just skim or skip those scenes) so if you’re mainly looking for that kind of thing this probably won’t be very helpful to you. jsyk.
i’m not great at describing stuff but i’ll do my best, i’ll also try and add tw’s when neccesary.
i wil try and keep updating this with any other decent fics i find, feel free to rec stuff too since i’m like 7 years behind.(edit 1/25/21) this is getting looooong so i’m going to start making another list on my spn blog rather than update this one
(edit 1/3/21) since this has gotten pretty long i’ve added rating/approximate word counts and marked my particular favorites with an asterisk.
Dean/Cas fic:
So Says The Sword*** - explicit/85k. FUCK its good...au/time travel where dean is not pulled out of hell by cas and says yes to becoming the michael sword. honestly could serve as an alternative to actually watching the show, if you want to get into dean/cas without actually doing that to yourself.
Fata morgana.*  - teen/6k, pst s9 finale. very bela centric and i love it, she finds cas looking for dean in hell.
Redemption Road -misc/600+k. an incredibly long fic from a collaborative writing group back in the day. canon divergent from the end of s6 on, has a cool take on godstiel and the leviathans, as well as the lovecratian mythos connection. ngl when i reread it i only made it about 28% in but imo the casual reader can actually stop around there, the rest concerns a lovecraftian apocalypse that is still good (i think i don’t remember it very well) but not required to enjoy the first half. if you prefer i have an ebook version i can send you on gdrive.
Someone Who's Feeling For Me* - mature/45k, s12. they run into lisa braeden and dean thinks cas is into her while cas thinks dean still likes her. treats lisa way better than the show ever did and the miscommunication is pretty funny rather than annoying.
a turn of the earth - mature/95k. time travel fic where cas from s10 keeps showing up in deans life from a few years before s1 to right before the hellhounds take his soul.  slow burn, good character study, and at one point cas punches the dad in the face and it rules.
On the Wings of War - teen/85k, canon divergent s5. dean accidentally becomes the Horseman of War. plays fun, fast and loose with biblical lore, michael has some rights.
Named - mature/95k, alternate s5. EXTREMELY blasphemous in a fun sexy way. manages to predict metatron almost to a T. there’s one major character death and its literally jesus christ, everyone is very sad about it and it sets the rest of the story rolling. an alternate interpretation of cas’ mission to raise dean from hell which had me on the floor. ngl its kind of misogynistic at points, but its from 2010 and tracks with late oughts-2010 spn (sorry anna the author did you dirty here:/).
The Girlfriend Experience - explicit/15k. uhhh i don’t normally rec or even read smutty stuff unless someone i know is specifically asking for it but this has stuff like sam trying to be a good ally and dean thinking holding hands with cas is ‘kinda gay :/’ minutes after having gay sex with him.
i crippled your heart a hundred times - explicit/19k, s8. cas confesses his feelings and dean spends a long time getting his head out of his ass about it. truly hits different after the actual confession, despite being written six years early it feels like its actually what could have gone down more or less if the writers weren’t talentless demons who hate us.
My Roots Take Flight** - mature/125k. reverse au where cas is a hunter and dean’s an angel...OR IS IT???? an alternate retelling of s4. tw for briefly being set in a psychiatric hospital/the hospital being mentioned somewhat frequently throughout the fic, plus more references to torture in hell and heaven than usual.
The One Thing You Can't Lose* - teen/4k.you know those posts about how cas is a super-strong super-tough ancient warrior but he just lets dean tug him around because he likes it? thats it thats the fic.
Hands, From Which All Things Are Built - teen/14k, post s8′s ‘goodbye stranger.’ cas is on the run with the angel tablet but keeps in touch with sam and dean by text, he and dean still manage to be terrible at Actual communication.
Autrement, Danger - or, The Account of an Exceedingly Long Day - mature/30k, post s11. a monster that takes the appearance of your soulmate leads to some wild miscommunications and dealing with years of repression, also dean gets to see cas’ true form which is always cool. tw for non-graphic mentions of underage sexual assault/sex work.
Down to Agincourt - mature/explicit/900++++k, endverse continuation. endverse!cas survives his encounter with lucifer and discovers another time-displaced dean from s7. i’ve only read the two of four parts but its really good, veeeeery slow burn, has a lot of fun oc’s and takes a rather surprising but (imo) entertaining and intriguing turn into Hellenic history and mythology. usual tw’s for endverse/endverse!cas but nothing graphic, it’s actually pretty light-hearted (relatively speaking of course).
Nothing Equals the Splendor** - explicit/8k, THEE finale fix it fic you’ve been waiting for! posits that the entire final episode was just a (very bad and lame) djinn’s vision.
like moses and batman and james dean - explicit/31k, post s8. explores dean’s trauma and internalized homophoba from his technically canon experience with sex work and its impact on his relationship with cas. the sex work itself isn’t really shown in any detail but it’s still a relatively heavy fic.
Crazy Diamonds - explicit/25k, s4/alternate s14. fresh-out-of-hell dean and dean from 10 years in the future are displaced from time and sent to each other’s present.
where the weeds take root - explicit/30k. au where the men of letters kick them out of the bunker and they accidentally move out into the country, get over their codependence and semi retire. featuring chicken coop building, sam volunteering at a dog shelter, gardening, and blissfully mundane domesticity.
No Resting Place - teen/6k. djinn dream fic, switches back and forth between cas’ dream of being married to dean and retired from hunting to the aftermath when he wakes up. tw for brief mention of suicide since, y’know, djinn dream.
any port in a storm - mature/52k. post s8 finale. cas and dean have to pose as a couple going through a rough patch for a case and actually deal with their emotional baggage, cas struggles with being human and metatron is up to stuff.
all this and heaven too* - explicit/7k. in the author’s own words ‘...a love letter to every trans person who ever projected onto Dean Winchester.’ absolutely unzipped me emotionally and theologically, its just. so good. tw for very brief mentions of internalized transphobia/dysphoria.
Because it is* - mature/6k, finale fix it. killing chuck does not bring back anyone back and the winchesters spend a very long time dealing with what they’ve lost, cas and dean SOMEHOW still manage to have signifigant communication issues even after the confession. tw for suicidal thoughts/brief attempt.
Vena Amoris and Other Old-Fashioned Bullshit* - teen/4k, s6. when cas fell for dean it automatically soulbonded/angel married them, shenanigans ensue when dean finds out during the angel’s civil war. funny and actually written back when s6 was airing so cas is still (or at least pretending to be) kind of an OP asshole which is fun.
Rinse, Repeat - teen/3k, s8. angsty character study of cas as he’s reprogrammed and trained to kill dean. not really dean/cas since its just cas’ pov of canon events but its beautifully written and ends with him snapping out of it through the power of love (also now a canon event!).
Emergence - explicit/59k, canon divergent after s11. dean meets a hunter he only recognizes as their friend claire novak’s missing father, but soon realizes he might be the answer behind the mysterious void in his memories and feelings (aka everyone’s memories of cas are completely wiped away for three years).
Cuckoo And Nest - explicit/10k, early established relationship/character study, cas tries to figure out how he fits into dean’s life and space in the bunker.
Build a Home* - teen/20k, canon divergent s12. sam and eileen are cute and turn the bunker into men of letters/hunters hq and everyone but cas moves in, mutual miscommunication issues and pining ensues.
Down in the River - teen/5k, early s8, cas prays to dean in purgatory while sam and dean try to figure out a way to get him out.
Teaching Poetry to Fish* - mature/52k, ?? BC through the entire series/canon divergent s14 and 15. retelling of crucial scenes throughout the shows timeline from cas’ pov, feat. actual fish and poetry.
the minor fall, the major lift - gen/4k, post confession/finale fixit. dean goes into the empty to save cas and runs into several old friends (and enemies).
With the Kisses of His Mouth* - teen/3k, gen later seasons. dean and cas keep kissing by accident.
Remaining Grace - explicit/109k, alternate s6. au where cas asks dean for help with raphael and dean, of course, does. tw for temporary major character death/semi-graphic depictions of alcohol withdrawal.
The face of heaven.* - teen/10k, au, dean is a regular guy and cas is a fallen star (think ‘stardust’, kinda).
Stories Are Made of Mistakes*  - teen/5k. newly human cas has trouble getting used to a human body and humanity in general, but still figures out that he and dean are A Thing before dean does.
Hurry Up And Wait - mature/21k, canon divergent s12. a fairyland and quite possibly LOTR related case comes up and dean goes full fanboy, mary is introduced to the wonders of the peter jackson adaptions, many references and comparisons (including between cas and dean’s ‘friendship’ and arwen/aragon). also charle is still alive and has just been doing fairy stuff this whole time.
There Are Many Things - explicit/28k, s9. cas is extremely lonely/touch-starved and trying to figure out this whole human thing, as well as where he and dean stand after being kicked out of the bunker.
It's A Long Life to Always Be Longing - teen/40k, post s11 finale. amara helps dean by putting him in a magical coma so he can finally get some much needed rest and show him possible futures for him, sam and cas. meanwhile sam and cas go on a roadtrip (or several) to find componets for a spell to wake dean up. really good sam and cas friendship, they actually talk about their shared lucifer trauma and stuff.
Non-Photo Blue - gen/2k, s4/5/alternate s5. fifty moments from cas’ memories of dean.
Tall Grass - explicit/57k, canon divergent post series. cas becomes the ultimate plant dad. feat the wayward sisters gang, cathartic character growth, fun oc’s, domesticity, and lots of actual botanical info-dumping.
on vessels - no rating/gen/2k. established dean/cas, cas tells dean about how he used to imagine what it would be like to have him as his vessel.
search for tomorrow on every shore* - teen/11k, post-finale (extremely derogatory). some angels in jack’s new heaven act out and dean gets temporarily resurrected in 2003 and runs into his younger self.
Architecture of the Minotaur’s Heart - explicit/45k, very canon divergent post s1. dean’s new house seems to have a life and mind of its own, while in his dreams he sees glimpses of a world and apocalypse that never came to be and an angel that looks strangely like his mysterious neighbor, cas. loosely inspired by the book house of leaves (which i highly recommend for fans of weird horror).
The Distance Of The Setting Sun - explicit/17k, post s5. established dean/cas relationship, team free will finally takes advantage of cas’ abilities to go on vacation around the world.
diamond star halo - teen/5k, s11. dean lets cas use him as a temporary vessel while he recovers from rowena’s spell, sam is a long-suffering third-wheel.
Make Known** - teen/16k, s6/7. dean struggles to understand how cas could have become his enemy and whether he ever truly knew him in the first place.
blunt little instrument* - mature/1.4k, post finale. dean finally confronts his father in heaven, very cathartic.
my heart a compass*** - teen/10k, post confession. the empty forces cas to re-experience his most regretted moments while dean tries to snap him out of it and bring him home.
A Crash Course in Someone Else's History - teen/11k, s6. cas from the very start of s4 is brought forward in time by s6!cas to distract the brothers from his and crowley’s plans.
The Cuckoo Father - mature/8k, s7 au. the woman who found cas in the river post-leviathans does not marry him bc he was sent to her by god or whatever, but actually identifies him as jimmy novak and sends him back to claire and amelia.
The Dead Dean Clause* - teen/5k, post alt s5 ending. team free will celebrates surviving taking down lucifer by getting blitzed, cas lies to a cop and gets an impromptu driving lesson. title/description sound dark i know but it’s actually very funny and light.
Suck It, Judy Garland - mature/20k, s12 (after the ‘i love you...i love all of you’ episode). cas and sam have to pretend to be a couple for a case and dean is NOT happy about it.
By Daylight and In Dream - teen/16k, s5. pre-dean/cas, dean invites cas to use his dreams to hide from the other angels. tw for very brief mention of a memory/dream of alastair sexually assaulting dean.
The Five People You Meet in Heaven - mature/22k, post-canon. an actually happy (if sometimes bittersweet) heaven endgame written several years ago, though some details are rather eerily similar to the show’s ending.
heaven is a place on earth* - teen/2k. dean’s pov of some of the times cas left him behind throughout the show, and one alternate ending where he finally gets to stay.
I Cleanse The Mirror - teen/20k, alternate s6. dean’s body is stolen by an ancient elemental and his soul has to hitch a ride in cas’ vessel.
an exploration of gender; angelic*** - mature/4k. *oscar isaac voice* lets get into angel gender politics!! aka cas is trans.
Zenith - explicit/33k, s9. after 9x06 an angry witch curses cas with the ability to see supernatural beings and human souls.
La cucina. - gen/3k, alt s9. dean goes wild helping a newly-human cas find out what kinds of food he likes, or the early s9 domesticity we deserved!
Dean Winchester, Cocksucker at Rest***** - teen/7k, post-finale. john and mary finally come over for dinner and john reacts to dean/cas in a rather predictable fashion. SOOOOOOOOO good omg, its so funny and a little sad and very very cathartic. part of a series that has a few other really good short fics.
The Way You Didn't Go - teen/5k, s15. coda to 15.09, dean has nightmares about the moc!cas timeline.
On Drowning - teen/28k. dean saves cas after he nearly drowns, they both try and deal with the physical/mental fallout (aka the fic where thee iconic “you only touch me when you think I’m dead or dying” originates). tw for realistic depictions of drowning/triage/misc medical information.
The Thirty-Six Questions That Lead to Love* - mature/13k. claire has dean and cas pretend to be her gay dads for a case and they play the titular 36 question game, get mistaken for swingers, and birdwatch, among other things.
Assorted F/F stuff:
Deep Breaths* - mary/ellen, au where mary said no to azazel’s deal and let john stay dead, still becomes a milf.
Like Rebel Diamonds - krissy/claire, they become hunter gf’s on the hunt for cas to kick his ass for taking jimmy. not-so-stealth dean/cas as well.
To Ash and Bone - anna/ruby, same author as the previous fic (p much all of her stuff is good from what i recall). au where ruby is a witch and helps anna when she’s cursed.
Holy Clockwork Angels - jo/ruby, STEAMPUNK au with very cool worldbuiilding.
At Day's End - jo/anna (my fucking KINGDOM for more jo/anna content, the dean/cas parallels are allllll there), au where they are both at the camp in the endverse and gfs.
these posts - ok so not actually a fic but i’m now obsessed with this hannah/meg dynamic.
Tagelied - mary/ellen, the true story of how ellen got into hunting before angels interfered.
Hell's Bells** - meg/abaddon, alternate s8/9 where meg survives crowley’s attack with sam’s help and teams up with abaddon (who she has a sk year old crush on) to take back hell.
The Ecstasy of the Rose - anna/ruby, anna travels back in time to escape heaven and becomes a signifigant part of ruby’s old human life.
Angel Underground - anna/jo, kind of an urban fantasy au with a very intriguing premise (sadly its very short, i’d love to see more if this ‘verse).
Clover, Flame - billie/mary, billie was always the reaper that showed up to take mary after her death(s) over the years.
Drag Me To Heaven - anna/ruby, a variant on the ‘last night on earth’ thing with dean.
Come Home* - jo/anna, canon-divergent au where anna is the new waitress at the roadhouse and helps jo set up a (probably not really) haunted house for halloween.
2K notes · View notes
peaches-writes · 4 years
Text
full circle
description: even if you’ve only known him for eight years, if you think about it, you’ve actually been with minho for most of his entire life. member: minho / lee know genre: fluff, historical au, vampire au, time traveler au, college au, neighbour au, best friends to lovers au, fem reader, this is a longer and revised version of reliable source word count: 10k warnings: explicit language, mentions of animal murder, war, death, blood, alcohol note: yay a third entry to the seven hundred and one universe! oc from seven hundred and one universe is named shiyeon here while the oc from kart rider is named soojung! + this prolly has a lot of plot holes & is just generally mediocre but whatever it’s fiction lmao + @skzwriternet​
Tumblr media
present: February 13, 2020
Even before he saw you on the other side of his apartment door at 9 PM with all of your work materials and equipment, Minho already knew full well that this day was coming. He’s always known most days are coming. He‘s just more excited for this in particular than the rest, given its inevitability that he‘s lived through for almost 600 years of his total 900 years as a vampire. Tonight, as evidenced by the Google Docs displayed on your open laptop, is the night you’d travel to the past for your doctorate thesis and meet his past self for the first time. 
He just didn’t expect this in particular to be on the day right before Valentine’s Day, when he and his two other housemates have decided to make a complete mess out of the kitchen with all of the chocolate they’ve been trying to make.
“Hi, sorry for bothering you at this hour but I was thinking—ew, what’s that smell?” You instinctively and bluntly ask first, sniffing the air escaping his side of the door. Minho could smell it too, strongly at that, and the older vampire could only purse his lips and widen his eyes at you. “Are you guys—please don’t tell me you’re actually cooking humans this ti—“
At that, he immediately shakes his head and breaks out into a nervous laugh, pulling the door closer to his body and effectively hiding Jisung scrambling around for the exhaust (and maybe the fire extinguisher too, for some reason) before you could peer over his shoulder. “No, no! It’s just Jisung and Jeongin—well, it’s mostly Jeongin then he dragged Jisung in on it—they’re making Valentine’s Day chocolates for...some people.”
You could sense the slight bluff in his tone (supported further by the little heart-shaped candy on his cheek) and that at least one of those ‘some people’ he could possibly be referring to is one of your friends, Nari, whom Jeongin has not-so-discreetly been pining over since your second year of college, but you easily let it slide. In the eight years you’ve known the vampires who live and own your apartment complex, after all, you’ve definitely walked in on much wilder things than a couple of questionably burnt chocolates (chocolates aren’t even cooked, as far as you’re concerned!). “Um, okay, sure, I’ll trust you with that.” You squint your eyes at him. “Anyway, can I come in? I need your help with something.” 
Minho exhales a small sigh of relief which he turns into a smile for you before looking over his shoulder once to make sure that the coast is clear then opening the door wide once again. “Yeah, come on in.” He concludes next, picking up your backpack on the floor and your heavy laptop in your hands as you cross the threshold. “But it’s really messy in the common area right now so we’ll have to stay in my room, if that’s okay with you.” 
You’ve never been in his room, not even when you first became friends in your first year of college eight years ago or on game nights when he always asks for help taking out his Play Station sets. All of Jisung and Jeongin’s jokes of his serial killer tendencies when you’re not around could be true for all you know and it’s the only thing going through your head as you wordlessly follow him inside his apartment, pondering on the thought.
In response, Minho bites down a laugh between his teeth next to you as he accidentally reads your thoughts and when you catch him in the act, you make sure to elbow him with your freer arm, careful of your drafts binder. “Ya, stop reading my thoughts without permission, you asshole!” You scold him in a sharp hiss right as you pass Jisung and Jeongin in the open doorway leading to the kitchen. You greet the two courteously and even make a salute to the fallen chocolates, to which Minho laughs even more at and the two boys groan in protest. “Well, shit, it really is...bad.”
“I know, poor people who’ll get that tomorrow.” Minho shrugs.
“You could say Nari, it’s fine, I won’t tell.” You shrug back with a laugh, taking this time to take the candy off of his cheek and walking past him and the other two boys with a parting wave before Jeongin could even process that you caught up to him and his crush so easily.
Minho, meanwhile, clears his throat awkwardly and follows you, in a poor attempt to hide his immediate flustered expression. Some of the chocolates were actually for you but he won’t tell you that too, of course.
Especially not when you arrive in his room not long after, nodding in approval at its cleanliness that clearly contrasts the current state of his kitchen and, by a slight extension, living room. “Glad you to know you don’t murder people in your room, Min. See? We get closer as friends would every day.”
“I’ve been on blood bag and animal diet since we met, you brat. Don’t tease like that.” Minho rolls his eyes, prompting you to laugh.
“So, where do I work, then?” You ask after, turning to Minho on your side and accidentally brushing your shoulders together.
He gestures to his work table in response, naturally placing his other hand on your back and guiding you towards it. He really hopes you’d be oblivious to the way he’s growing more flustered this time. He doesn’t let you in his room for a reason, after all (that being it’s too intimate in his opinion). “You can use my desk.” He instructs you after, following you and pulling an extra chair for himself once you’ve reached his desk. Placing your backpack next to his work bag then your laptop on top of the table, he then asks, “So, are you travelling now or later?”
He already knew you’d do it sometime now, he really just wanted to ask to keep the conversation going. He even has your hanbok ready—bought from Changbin’s wife’s shop last month.
But, to you, he seems to have miscalculated the situation a little bit as a realization dawns on you while you’re taking out the portable time travel machine from your backpack. It’s actually just a watch but your professors insist on keeping them in really fancy boxes. “I can do it now if it’s oka—wait, I haven’t even told you that part yet! How do you know I’m not just going to hoard your wi-fi?” You exclaim mid-thought, your mouth falling agape and forming an ‘o’ shape in surprise. You know he wasn’t reading your mind just now because, usually, Minho would announce his presence obnoxiously loud in your head or make the face he did a while back but he didn’t this time. “So you’re going to agree to my request? Is that it?”
Eyes equally wide in his mistake, Minho falls back in his chair and ends up fumbling around with his words. “Well—no, I mean, you always only need my help when you’re about to time travel so—!” He tries his best to cover up which only elicits a victorious smile from you. “Ugh, fine, you got me!”
“So, you’ll help me? I mean, past you, technically.” You ask again for confirmation, sitting down on your own chair this time as you fully take out the portable machine and place it on your lap. “I have to tell you, though, that I need to travel to three other periods for my thesis this time. Is that okay?” 
Minho props his elbow on the arm rest and nods against his knuckles. “You already know the answer to that, I think.” 
You chuckle at this. If eight years of knowing him has taught you anything, it’s to pay attention to the smallest details. He’s clairvoyant, after all, and you need to up him at his own game every now and then somehow. “Then, I’ll also need the proper attire. Haseul said that she can’t take in commissions at the moment so I couldn’t—“
“In the closet, furthest right.” Minho gestures to the walk-in closet behind him in defeat. “You can use that for all the times you’ll go, too.” 
“Have I told you that you’re my bestest friend in the world today? Even more than Nari, and she’s a witch, might I add!” You dramatically announce with a grin, handing him the machine’s box before standing up and making a beeline to the double doors on the other side of his bed. When you follow his instructions and find a pink and blue hanbok along with a floral hairpin on the very end of his closet, you then take it out and head to the open bathroom across the room. “Oh, wow, you even got my size right! You must’ve been preparing for this for a long time, huh?”
He really has—but, again, Minho is too stubborn to admit it to your face. “Just tell me if it’s uncomfortable or something.” He simply replies to you instead before you could close the door and change. Once he hears you acknowledge him with a hum before clicking the door to a lock, he then quickly prepares the time travel watch for you (by the way he remembers you doing it in front of him countless of times while you were cramming for a school requirement with him) then places it next to your laptop in exchange for his phone to message the rest of his friends.
minho [9:13 PM]: its happening
chan [9:14 PM]: you’re confessing?
hyunjin [9:14 PM]: hey that’s great! good for you hyung!!!
minho [9:16 PM]: no! y/n’s making the travel to 1388!
changbin [9:18 PM]: chan u know not to get ur hopes up w minho alr we all know he’s hopeless
minho [9:21 PM]: just bc ur alr married u brat
Changbin was still typing out a reply in the groupchat when you came out of the bathroom in your hanbok, laughing behind your hand when Minho looks up and momentarily gapes at you. “Why are you looking at me like that, weirdo?” You furrow your brows as you approach, smacking his arm before sitting down on his bed right behind him with a slight struggle. Peering over his shoulder, you smile appreciatively at noticing the time machine already set up. “And I see you’ve set up the machine without breaking anything this time! Progress!”
Minho scoffs, swiveling his wheeled chair to face you properly before gesturing to the hairpin in your hands. “You don’t like the hairpin?”
"I don’t know why you’re making me wear a hairpin that looks like a wedding heirloom.” You frown. Not to mention, from it’s material, you could tell that it’s new as well, meaning it was designed this way on purpose. “Won’t it attract too much attention?” 
Minho doesn’t know why you eventually came to him in the past wearing the hairpin too. He thought his future self was being ridiculous then (and he still does in the moment). “I don’t know, either,” He tells you truthfully this time, standing up from his chair to place it on your tightly-made bun. “But you did come wearing it eventually so just go with the flow, I guess? I don’t know, what do your sci-fi movies say?” 
You scoff at him, puffing out the heat rising up to your cheeks at the proximity. He could read your mind if he wants to but he doesn’t seem to be in the moment, even when his lips are gently fanning air into your ear as he fixes the hairpin with utmost care. “I guess I’ll just have to follow your instincts, then.” You sigh in defeat. “I can’t miss a detail, even if it’s weird.” 
“Right. I was there in the moment before you right now.” He smiles cheekily before sitting back down on his chair, passing you your time travel box after. “Ready to go?” 
You nod, fixing your collar one last time before receiving the machine from his hands. “You haven’t met me in the 1388, right?” 
“The first time you met me in the past was in the 1910s for that graduate thesis of yours and the oldest version of me that you’ve met so far was the one from the the 1740s.” Minho corrects, recalling your fourth year thesis some eight years ago. “But the first time I met you in my history was for this doctorate.” 
Your eyes light up at this. “Really? You’re meeting me for the first time now?” 
“Yeah. Why?” 
“We’ll have differing first impressions after this!” You point out to which he snickers. “Also, I haven’t met this version of you, you might be a snob in 1388 and think I’m weird or something.” 
Minho personally doesn’t think his first impression of you will ever change, no matter when you’ll meet in time. He’ll always think positively of you. “I was already turned for a long time, then. I haven’t met Chan and the others but I’ve seen and heard of weirder things than a time traveler.” He assures you. “Now, go, so I can help Jisung and Jeongin in the kitchen.” 
Rolling your eyes, you then set the date to January 1388 (you notice Minho’s already set the location while you were in the bathroom) before bidding a temporary goodbye to him, disappearing into thin air with the watch on your wrist right after. “I’ll be back before you know it!” 
In the blink of an eye, you’re already in a flea market somewhere in Seoul (then named Hanseong, you made sure to remember that well out of all of your history and anthropology notes). 
past: January 1388
You easily find 1388 Minho wandering around the flea market, a crowd of court men and women following him religiously as he examines the crops, livestock, and flowers being sold in stalls. The sight makes you scoff in disbelief, even more when you approach and see how he ignores each and every one of them up close. 
You know Minho isn’t the one of royal blood in his current coven of vampires (that’s Hyunjin—you know it well from the amount of times you’ve pestered him in your other time travels while he was sulking over his present day fiancée) but he has mentioned in passing once about being popular in the palace court, a socialite of his time if you will. 
But then, who could blame him? He’s just that handsome and charming.  
“Minho...Lee Minho...” You try calling for him in the crowd but to no avail, the slight embarrassment of following the crowd creeping up to you. It reminds you a bit of when you first saw him in your timeline, your first year of college and his fourth year (because Chan keeps insisting that he goes to university every now and then to pass the time) when all kinds of students would also follow him around at the campus library. It’s annoying, regardless of wherever you are in the world timeline. “Excuse me, Lee Minho!”��
He only turns to you when you raise your voice, an eyebrow momentarily raised until your eyes meet and a look seemingly of recognition crosses his features. 
You became friends with him as an older vampire but why is he more intimidating as a younger one? It’s probably the rest of the crowd’s eyes being on you because of your sudden interruption. Either way, you forcibly gulp down your nervousness and call for him again. “Lee Minho?” 
“Yes?” 
“C-Can I—Can I talk to you for a moment?” You gesture for him to follow you, his piercing gaze making your hands shake a bit. This is probably what Chan meant when he said Minho was a bit scary when he first met him in the 1400s. 
Minho follows you, anyway, which alleviates and heightens your nervousness at the same time. The crowd would’ve followed if not for him glaring at them not to right before you turned to the main entrance of the flea market where a few people were loitering around at. He feels like he knows you from somewhere which, if you knew about, you’d tell him that that’s impossible since, chronologically, you haven’t met him before this. 
Once you’re away from the majority of the market crowd, only then do you turn to properly face him and his expectant eyes. He’s still looks the same as he does in the present, just more curious, seeing as you’re a stranger for now. It’s comforting, somehow, so much so that it relaxes you and eventually makes you laugh as well. 
“What’s so funny?” He asks you without any hint of malice once you uncontrollably burst into giggles, prompting you to lift your hand up to your mouth. Already developing his clairvoyant abilities at this time period, he could easily tell by the unfamiliar terms in your thoughts and the way you hold yourself up that you were different—far more different than everyone around you. “And who are you?” 
You wave your other hand dismissively, taking a step back to recuperate. You end up giggling a few more times before you could manage to take a deep breath and exhale slowly by turning your eyes away from Minho momentarily. “I’m sorry, I’m Y/N and I—sorry! It’s just so...it’s a bit weird!” 
“Definitely.” Though your answer is unsatisfactory, the boy nods anyway. “And how do you know my name?”  
“I know you from the futur—wait, you can tell that it’s a bit weird too?” You raise an eyebrow and fold your arms over your chest. “It’s…sometime in the 1300s—“
“Thirteen eighty-eight.”
“Right.” You nodded at his correction with a dry scoff, piquing his interest further. “It’s only 1388 and you’re already this good of a clairvoyant?”
Minho was instinctively taken aback with you. His present self forgot to tell you that clairvoyance doesn’t have an established name in this time yet. “How did you—? What? Huh, well…the hanbok—the hanbok’s a bit of a giveaway too, I guess. It looks different from what the court women usually wear.” 
You then briefly glanced down at your hanbok, a pout resting on your features when you look back up at Minho again. “Really? But you—I mean, my source told me that this was accurate.” Come to think of it, you didn’t really check the attire thoroughly since you really needed to travel immediately to cram your paper. You’ll have to give 2020 Minho an earful about this later. “Ah, guess it’s my fault for not double-checking. I was in a bit of a rush to come here.” 
Minho from 1388, however, shakes his head at you in disapproval then briefly begins pointing out the different design patterns that looked foreign to him. “And this hairpin,” He pointed your hair accessory last, from what you can remember at present. There’s an unreadable expression in his face, one you’re too flustered to interpret as amusement. “This looks like a wedding heirloom but…a bit futuristic for my time, if that makes sense. I don’t suppose you wanted to come here disguised as someone’s wife, right? That’d attract more attention to you.”
And with that, you almost immediately deflate right in front of him with a defeated sigh and he smirks teasingly in return. To the passersby at the flea market, people could’ve easily mistaken the two of you for a quarreling married couple. “So that’s how it is.” You surrender easily, your arms loosening. “I guess even at this time you’re clairvoyant and smart. How annoying.”
His smirk grows even more triumphantly at this. “So, why did you come here?” He asks next. He figures out halfway through your rambles that it’s probably better to go along with you than to insist on his own questions, at least until you’ve organized your thoughts a little bit better. 
You ponder on the question for a moment, shifting your weight between the balls of your feet to pass the time. When you do answer, you explain, “Well, it’s a little crazy but my source has said that you’ll be okay with it so...believe it or not, I’m from the future and doing my doctorate thesis on a dynasty that’s about to establish itself around this time.” When 1388 Minho doesn’t immediately and visibly freak out as he would on your worst case scenario, you take this as your cue to continue. “You’re still alive in my time but I can’t tell you what our relationship is or it’ll be spoilers! All I can say is that you’ve helped me passed a lot of my major requirements in school and if you’re okay with it, you can help me with this one too!” 
The Minho in front of you thinks that you probably know him very well to know that he’s not easily spooked with anything out of the ordinary, not even by someone who claims to be from the future and is doing an academic paper about the past. You did mention knowing his personal history, as well, which effectively gained you his trust. He just hopes you’re not married or something in the future as the hairpin seems to be trying to imply or else he’d consider this first meeting of yours a bit chaotic for his liking. “Sure. Where do you have to be right now?” 
Really? It’s that easy? Is all you can think about, much to Minho’s curiosity when he reads your thoughts. “O-Oh, well, um...if you can take me to the palace courts, that would be...cool, I mean nice.” 
And so, Minho from 1388 ends up showing you around the palace courts for the next six months that follows (but, really, it’s just merely six minutes in the present time), even introducing you to people whom you ended up entrusting with your data-gathering. You almost mentioned Hyunjin and his fiancé, Shiyeon, on more than one occasion, remembering how the vampire would be with Seungmin already by this time while the immortal witch would be travelling around Korea, but opted not to instead when you also remember that no one from this time period really liked talking about the previous fire that killed most of Hyunjin’s family. 
Besides, you didn’t want to mess up the timeline and have Minho meet Hyunjin before he could meet Chan, even when he would ask you about it right before you left. 
“How am I in the future, by the way? Am I allowed to ask that?” Minho asks you curiously as you hold out your watch in front of him. It was starting to get annoying, having to hide it in your bell sleeves all the time. “And what am I doing by then?” 
“I can’t say anything specific that’s important.” You scrunch up your nose disapprovingly to which Minho only glares at you in response. “Just trust me, you’re sort of happy with where you are in my present day. You don’t have to worry about it now, it’s still 600 years away, anyway.” 
Minho mistakenly interprets that as the two of you being married in the future. He doesn’t have feelings for you in this time period but he takes your word not to worry about it until it’s happened. 
Besides, you seem kind. He’ll see something in you eventually. 
“When will I see you again, then?” 
“Um...around 1418, probably?” You answer with a hint of uncertainty as you faintly recall your thesis’ outline. You needed to see King Sejeong’s court next. “You’ll still be here, right?” 
Minho initially had plans on moving to a nearby province but he nods, anyway, thinking that that could wait for a few more years. “Yeah.” 
And with that, you’re gone again. 
present: February 13, 2020 
When you get back to the present day, it’s only 9:35 PM, almost six minutes since you left, but Minho’s already in the kitchen, helping Jisung and Jeongin clean up their mess. 
“Back already?” Minho asks with a blood bag between his teeth when he catches sight of you by the open doorway as he wipes the kitchen island clean, immediately noticing the grin you wear on your face. “What did you think?” 
“You were much chiller then!” You exclaim, ducking past Jeongin and Jisung to sit down right across Minho on the countertop. “I mean, you were a bit scary at first with the whole glaring thing you got going on but you were very calm and collected, then, like you weren’t even phased about me being from the future!” 
Of course he would be at that time, he was literally there when it happened (and also because he’s always had a feeling even from before that you’d meet but that’s also on his long list of things he won’t tell you). Instead, you see him quirk an eyebrow, throwing the rag towel in his hand to the side to pick up his phone and resume his Kart Rider. “Weirdoes vibe with weirdoes, I guess.” He shrugs, chuckling when you protest at this. “Anyway, you got what you need, right?”
You nod happily with a hum, propping an elbow up on the now clean counter and resting your cheek on your palm. “I have enough to write about later when you’re done cleaning.” 
“Ya, Y/N, if you’re gonna stick around at least help us clean the kitchen!” Jisung complains as he drags a wet mop across the floor behind you. 
“And why would I do that? I didn’t even help you make the chocolates!” 
“Because Minho’s been making cho—” Before Jisung could finish his sentence, however, Minho throws his rag towel towards the younger vampire, aiming it directly to his face. “Ya!” 
You shake your head in disbelief, turning to Minho again after. “Anyway, I have to fix my notes for a bit and you need to tell me where else I went for this paper!” 
Also because you were kinda cute back then, you think to yourself more as an after-thought, not really expecting for Minho to accidentally hear it.   
Now, Minho knows why he made you wear the hairpin. Is it normal to be jealous of one’s past self? 
Tumblr media
present: February 16, 2020 
Minho offers you a whole bag of your favorite mini Toblerones the next time that you knock on his door to work on your thesis. The Valentine’s Day homemade chocolates were a fail even when Felix was eventually brought in last-minute (then you just had to disappear for a whole day with Nari and Shiyeon, too), so he rushed to the nearest convenience store to buy you the Toblerones as soon as you told him that you’ll come over again to pester him with his Internet connection and ask him more about your work. 
Maybe this is really it, the one you were talking about in his past. 
“You’re being nice to me with all this chocolate.” You squint your eyes with a piece of the chocolate in between your teeth suspiciously across the dining table as you work, head buried in papers to revise and dusty reference books. Your professor has you on travel limit as everyone else, only allowing you up to four actual visits to the past, hence the mountainous stacks of library books and journals you’ve borrowed from both the campus library and Changbin’s personal collection. “What do you need? Ya, I’m talking to you.” 
Minho, busy in his own academic work on his laptop, only peeks up at you belatedly when he’s reaching out for his blood bag buried underneath all of your papers. “What?” 
“What are the chocolates for?” You ask straightforwardly this time, picking up another mini Toblerone off the yellow bag. “Last time you bought me something from the convenience store was when you ate the squirrel I was feeding in the back garden.” 
Minho only shrugs as nonchalantly as he could, though he can’t help but feel a little flustered as evidenced by the way his eyes briefly widen. The squirrel incident was a long time ago and yet you still won’t let it go. “Can’t I be nice?” He simply asks back in answer to which you scoff at. He laughs along with you, anyway. “Jeongin bought it then gave me the extra, probably to give to you since I can’t really eat it.” 
You wanted to tell him that Nari actually shared the chocolates Jeongin gave her and they were definitely not Toblerones but you let it slide again. For some reason, it’s funny seeing Minho try to cover up something right in front of your face and thinking that he’s doing a good job at it. He’s trained you to see past his bullshit for the past 8 years, he should really know better. “Um...right.” You nod teasingly. “I’m gonna pretend you’re not looking very suspicious right now.” 
Minho could clearly tell that you’re doubting him even without reading you but he does nothing more to it. He’s too deep in his bullshit already and you both know that. 
Truth is, he was just fulfilling something you mentioned in your second visit to him (and probably as a way to give you something on Valentine’s Day even if it’s two days late). 
“Anyway, when are you making the travel again?” 
“Right after I finish summarizing this book.” 
And it happens to come full circle today, too. What luck does your best friend have. 
past: August 1418 
You jump between days in a span of six years this time (which is approximately an hour and twelve minutes back in the present time) with the help of Minho, Chan, and Changbin from 1418 helping you by preparing an entire closet of clothes and coming up with a very detailed background story of how you were a distant relative of Chan’s from the province in the case that someone asked about you. The other two boys were more than happy to welcome you despite how foreign time travel was to them in this time period because, apparently, you’re all Minho’s ever talked about since they met. 
“It’s nice knowing that Minho didn’t fever dreamed you up or something.” Changbin joked to you once towards the end of the six years of your data-gathering, to which he received a full apple shoved in his mouth from Minho. In this time period, his wife, Haseul, was still in that sleeping curse you still don’t understand fully at present, carefully laid in a tomb somewhere in the capital. Fortunately, you managed to avoid telling him that she wakes up seven centuries later (and that they get married) throughout your entire stay and avoided spoilers. “Vampires who’ve lived long like us tend to do that sometimes. Heck, even Chan does that lots of times these days, telling us about this immortal person he’s been looking for a while now. I guess it’s the human brain’s natural response to having a lot of memories.” 
“Minho remembers me just fine in the present, though.” You shrug as you re-write your interview notes, to which Minho mumbles a ‘Really?’ at. When you nod at him, he immediately rolls his eyes up in thought. You want to tell them that the person Chan’s been looking for at this time’s also real (and that he and said person, Eunhye, even live together now), too, but you decide against it later on for spoiler reasons again. “You have really good memory in the present, you even bought me Toblerones today.” 
“What are those?” 
A realization dawns on you right there and then, a small smile forming on your lips to which Minho quirks an eyebrow at and Changbin immediately asks you about. “You’ll find out soon enough. Just know that they’re my favorite.” You simply answer, standing up from the front porch of the inn you’ve been staying at and dusting the dirt off of your new hanbok. You remind yourself to ask Minho and Changbin about where these are at present later on. “Anyway, I’m off! I need to interview a few court people then I’ll be off your hairs again soon!” 
When it’s time for you to leave again, Minho’s still pestering you about what Toblerones are. 
“Come on, tell me!” He protests, going as far as holding your wrist where your watch is before you could escape. “Y/N!” 
You only grin up at him mischievously, gently swatting his hand away. “February 16, 2020! Also, make me ramen and coffee when I get back to the other side, please! I’d really like that!” 
present: February 16, 2020 
A steaming bowl of ramen and a warm cup of miraculously decently-brewed coffee are on the kitchen countertop by the time you come back, just as you asked him six hundred years in the past. What you didn’t expect, however, was the way your notes and references have also been organized neatly on the table while you were away and Minho dozing off on the nearby sofa in the open living room (he really likes genuine sleep lately which you’re yet to ask him as to why). You make sure to check that he really is sleeping by pinching his nose (and getting no response which is his usual indication of actual sleep) before placing the blanket he has reserved for you in his apartment over his hunched over body. 
“You don’t really need it,” You whisper tiredly, tucking the blanket close to his neck. His skin is naturally cold, as any normal vampire’s, but you’ve slowly grown accustomed to it over the years. “but how else am I going to say thank you for remembering my request after six hundred years? You’re going above and beyond anyone I’ve ever met, Lee Minho, you should stop raising the bar too high for men like this.” 
Tumblr media
three
past: May 1592
“Are you sure you want to be here?” Minho from 1592 asks you right after you’ve reappeared in his house. Chan is out for work and Changbin is visiting Haseul on this particular day, leaving him to tend to their main house alone. “We’re in the middle of—”
“A Japanese invasion, I know.” You finish his thought for him, casually plopping down on the front porch right next to him and gingerly receiving the cup of tea he offers you. The garden he’s been trying to tend the last time you were around hasn’t made any significant progress even when an entire century has passed. You want to think it’s because the boys have been travelling elsewhere right before you returned but you also know it’s because they haven’t met Seungmin and Hyunjin yet. Those two are still probably travelling with Shiyeon. “That’s exactly why I’m here.” 
“Don’t tell me you’re—” Minho leans away and gazes back incredulously at you. He can already tell, with his own abilities, that you’re not thinking of what he’s thinking but he asks anyway to fully confirm. “I’m not letting you go to the frontlines if that’s what you’re going to ask me this time.” 
You chuckle at his genuinely mortified expression as you sip on your tea, making the boy furrow his brows at you. You really must be crazy. “You already know I’m not thinking of that! Though, I will ask you crazier things in the distant future.” You assure him. “I’ll only be staying for a year, six years again at most since I only need to complete a few interviews and fact-check a few books.” 
“Good.” Minho sighs in relief, taking a long sip of his tea as well. Even in 1592, the only human beverage Minho could stand is tea, you’re quick to notice. “That’s...that’s a relief.” 
“Why would you even be worried about going to the field, you’re immorta—ya, perhaps, do you you care about me?” You tease, grinning widely at the sudden realization. “We have a really messed-up timeline but you already care about me as early as now, that’s cute!”   
Minho from this time period could only roll his eyes at you against his sudden flustered feeling. If he was curious of your relationship with his future self when you first met, he’s curious as to how his future self keeps up with you this time. “Because you might be important to me in the future or something.” He bluffs to which you only chuckle fondly at. “I can’t really tell since you won’t tell me exactly how I know you in the future.” 
“Well, what am I to you now?” 
“A friend.” And he means it truthfully.
You’re momentarily taken aback, Minho sees even when you’re quick to hide it. Present Minho won’t even call you his best friend like you do to him. “Then just—just remember that until then.” You point out, smiling when you gaze over to his side and see his sincere expression. Something leaps in your chest at hearing him say those words without his usual playful tone of voice. It’s not what you’ve always been hoping for but it’s a start. “Won’t it be better if you just find out in the moment when it does happen?” 
Minho wants to tell you that he can’t wait but his teasing nature always gets the best of him first, “Hm, maybe you don’t actually know me at all in the future, that’s why you’re always being vague when I ask you.” 
You scoff, smacking his arm. “Ya!” 
“So, really, what are you to me in the future?” He insists anyway, swiftly dodging your hits until he’s caught your wrist in his hands. “Friend? Best friend?” 
A lover? He wanted to add further but he bites his tongue back just in time.  
“I always call you my best friend but I’ve yet to hear the same thing from you so, honestly, how would I know when you’re so secretive with your true feelings all the time! I’m even surprised you answered my question just now.” You frown, unintentionally coming off as bitter in your tone of voice as you retract your hand back to your side. You place your cup down as well, careful of the remaining tea so it doesn’t accidentally spill on your hanbok. At this moment, you miss the way Minho’s expression turns into confusion. “If it helps, though, I can only tell you that you always let me in your house to hoard the wi-fi—which you don’t have to know about right now!—and you’ve kept me around long enough to know when you’re trying to lie to me or read my thoughts with your clairvoyance thing going on.” 
Minho nods along, humming in thought. “So you’re a parasite?” 
You inhale a deep breath, focusing all of your energy into restraining yourself from hitting him for a second time. “You’ve called me worse.” You sigh with a controlled laugh. “Expired dinner and ex-wife who has nowhere else to go are my personal favorites.” 
Next to you, Minho’s eyes genuinely widen in curiosity. “We got married?” 
“Um, no? No, no, it’s an expression!” You shake your head and snicker despite the contrasting heat on your neck. Minho grows flustered at sensing the blood rushing up to your face. “I don’t even know if you’re capable of romantic love, dude. You’re always kinda everywhere and nowhere.” 
Minho’s not offended, though, especially not when you try to apologize after at realizing that you’re not as close with this version of him as you are with the version you know in your own time. “It’s fine.” He assures you with a shrug, knowing full well that you were just kidding around. “I’m guessing with that that I’m still single five centuries later.” 
“That and a bit of a flirt, too.” You clarify before his words fully process in your head. “Wait, so that means you haven’t dated even before this?” 
Minho shakes his head. “No, no one’s caught my eye yet.” 
You purse your lips in thought of this new revelation. It’s in moments like this, when you’re meeting past selves of your immortal friends that you realize just how little you actually know of them. “Huh, I didn’t peg you as the type.” 
“The type to what?” 
You shrug slowly, hunching over in your seat. “To be the fall in love just once type? I don’t know...”
Chan has mentioned to you once about Minho believing in soulmates but you were quick to dismiss that then. Remembering that now, maybe he is right. 
And, as if he has been reading your thoughts this entire time, Minho agrees with a nod. “Then, now you know. If you’ve lived as long as I have, soulmates are really nice to think about.” 
“But you always tease me about it...you from the future at least.” You pout. “Again, no offense, it’s just that—from the way I know you in my time, you’re very confusing.” 
When you glance over at Minho, you see him sit up straighter and lean closer to you again, your shoulders bumping against his as he tilts his head to meet your gaze. “Really? How am I confusing? Maybe I can help.” 
You scrunch up your nose. “Ah, but that’s unfair. You’ll take note of this in the future again.” 
“Your time’s five hundred years away, I’m sure I’ll forget this with time.” He assures you to no avail as evidenced by your squinted eyes. 
“You remembered my ramen and coffee request from last time, though.” You argue back, making his eyes light up. 
“I will?” 
You nod, placing a finger on his forehead and pushing his face away from yours. “Yeah, so I don’t trust you. Let’s just leave it at that.” 
Minho doesn’t bother you anymore about it for the rest of your one-year stay, which you’re more than grateful for.
present: February 22, 2020 
He does, however, teases you about it again when you’re back to the present. Closing in on you in one of his bone-crushing hugs when you reappear in his room, he asks, “So, how was meeting me in the 1500s this time, best friend?”
“Excuse me, what did you say?” You furrow your brows at him, your arms going limp on your sides while your entire body freezes on the spot. 
“I just called you my best friend.” He repeats casually with a shrug. “Why?” 
Minho purposely omits the fact that he double-checked his old journals to make sure that you just time traveled to that period when you mentioned to him how he’s never called you his best friend. He’s been waiting for this opportunity to set it right with you since he didn’t know much of the context back then. 
You shake your head in response, reluctantly hugging him back once you’ve regained feeling in your arms again. “Nothing, it’s just...” 
“Dude, you’re acting like past me and present me are different people.” He chuckles against your hair, squeezing your frame once before pulling away. “So, we’re good, right? You’re not bitter about the whole best friend thing now?” 
You frown, slapping his elbow to which he only chuckles at. “Who said I was bitter?” 
“You did in 1592!” He teases, his mischievous grin softening into a fond smile after. “But seriously...sorry about that. I just think it’s cheesy to say most of the time but you really are...my best friend now I guess—maybe until you die in 50 years.”
Minho then runs away before you could even protest, prompting you to chase him out of his room and into the hallway. “Ya, Lee Minho! I’m going to kill you first, you brat!”  
But you know that deep in your heart that he’s only joking (and also because Jeongin has gossiped to you once about accidentally reading one of Minho’s journal entries from the 1700s once about meeting someone who shares your name but was already working as a professor in university and may or may not already be a vampire). 
Tumblr media
present: February 29, 2020
“Okay, to refresh...” You mumble as you adjust the watch on your wrist and the switchblade Minho insisted on you keeping in your pants’ pockets. Next to you, said vampire’s is sprawled on his bed, a reviewer and highlighter in hand. “In 1895, Hyunjin was following Shiyeon around the world, Seungmin was starting out his photography career, Soojung was taking a beauty nap, Haseul was still sleeping, Changbin was going on a Jack the Killer rampage somewhere in Europe, Jisung was still a newborn, Felix, and Jeongin haven’t joined you yet, and Chan was...learning yoga with Eunhye? Is that right?” 
“And I’ve met all versions of you by this time.” Minho adds in absentmindedly before going back to chanting his notes over and over again. He really doesn’t need to since he really has sharp memory these days but you let him study for whatever it is he’s studying, anyway, so he has something else to do besides Kart Rider and annoying his other friends. “Just tell past me who I’m meeting when you arrive since you know how I kept mixing graduate studies you and college thesis you up all the time.” 
“That’s...you guys have lived lives.” You puff out a tired breath, making Minho glance up to you briefly and chuckle. “Sometimes, it makes me and Nari feel so small.” 
“It’s not much.” The boy shrugs back. “It personally hasn’t felt that long.” 
“And why’s that?” You hum curiously. 
He mumbles something behind his paper but you don’t hear it well. When you ask him about it, he only shakes his head and kicks you with his socket foot, urging you to go already. 
Minho actually said, “It’s because you’ve been with me the entire time.” but he’ll just tell you all about it later when you come back. 
With a scoff, you then swat his foot away and bid him goodbye. “Fine, see you later then.” 
“I’ll organize your notes until then. Bye.” 
past: July 1895
Minho sets your location on your watch to his house, now renovated to what was considered modern then. You’ve been here countless of times, albeit in different time periods of your own past (the last being when you had to ask for his help in the 1860s about your graduate thesis), but you’ve never been here in the 1890s, not when a newborn Jisung had the self-control of a toddler and immediately tried pouncing on you the moment he smelled you on their front lawn.  
Now you know what the switchblade is for (and the one time Jisung kept apologizing to you in the 1910s). 
“Ji, calm down!” Minho growls in annoyance, holding the younger boy by his arms as he drags him back inside the house. He can feel your anxiousness increase just by looking at this unfamiliar side of Jisung, prompting him to send you an apologizing look. “Sorry, um, Y/N, I—” 
“I-It’s...it’s fine.” You assure shakily with a curt nod, taking a step back as well when Jisung tries regaining two steps towards you again. “I think I came in the wrong day.” 
“It depends. What are you here for?” He asks, his voice growing faint as he successfully manages to lock Jisung inside the house. He then quickly jogs back to you, examining your face for any recognizable hints of where you could be from.
“Doctorate thesis.” You answer for him, earning you a look of realization from him. 
“Oh, it’s you.” He smiles in relief. You remember distinctly how these were also the very same words he told you when you first met him in a time travel. “I was thinking you’d never come back.” 
You feign a frown in front of him, making him laugh. “Why? Did you think I wouldn’t finish my studies?” 
“It’s just that the next time you came back, from my point of view, is when you were only in college to ask me about the 1810s.” He clarifies, to which you nod in understanding. So he does remember. “I thought it weird at first that you didn’t come back sooner to finish your doctorate.” 
“Ah, well, you in 2020 has been a big help—well, him and a shit ton of books.” You chuckle awkwardly. “This is my last trip for my doctorate, actually, since I have the smallest amount of resources for Queen Min.” 
“T-This is—this is your last?” 
You smirk at his briefly dejected expression, elbowing him gently. “Why do you look so sad? You already know we’ll meet again in the future. Plus, you’ll still meet younger versions of me later on for my college requirements which is a bit confusing to hear right now but you’ll get it later!” 
Minho opens his mouth to speak, initially to tell you something about being frustrated that he’s only seen glimpses (and different versions) of you throughout his life so far, but he’s suddenly cut off by Jisung banging wildly against the front door, making him and you flinch. 
“Um...what if we deal with Jisung first?” You suggest. “I assure you we’re all going to be great friends in the future but no one really told me that this would happen.” 
Minho nods slowly next to you, rubbing the nape of his neck. “Yeah, we should probably take care of him first before your thesis. You could spare five minutes to sit down, right?” 
“Definitely.” 
And so, you spend the rest of your first day getting Jisung to calm down in your presence. 
present: February 29, 2020 
“Chan, babe, please, please, please promise that you won’t flinch when we use the party poppers later.” Eunhye sighs exasperatedly as she leads everyone into organizing the kitchen and living room. “Felix, good job on the cookies by the way! They turned out really well! Jisung, hurry up with that banner!” 
“Babe, I don’t flinch!” Chan yells across the hallway as he re-checks if everyone will have enough party hats, trumpets, and poppers for later. 
“Yes you do!” 
“What’s so significant about today, anyway?” Nari asks Jeongin as the two enter the apartment with boxes upon boxes of blood bags and alcoholic drinks. “Besides Y/N finishing their thesis, of course.” 
Shiyeon and Hyunjin follow closely behind with take-out boxes of chicken wings. “Because today is Y/N’s last time travel before they become a professor! A lot of good things are going to happen after, trust me.” Shiyeon answers with a wink. 
“How come you know all of that? You were barely with us in the 1800s.” Jisung asks while struggling to put the other end of your congratulations banner across the kitchen. Soojung is on the other end, arm beginning to fall asleep as she holds up the other end of the banner for Jisung. “Even Jeongin and Felix don’t know that.” 
“There’s a thing called correspondence and Hyunjin was a diligent gossiper.” Shiyeon only chuckles, setting down the take-out boxes on the countertop. “Also, hey, I was there in one of Y/N’s visits! It just hasn’t happened in our timeline yet but it will in three years!” 
Minho then emerges from his room, phone in hand counting down the seconds until you’re back again. “Okay, we have two hours to get everything ready.”
“Lee Minho where have you been this entire time!” Eunhye complains, finally taking the boy’s presence to take a seat. “I’ve been organizing everyone for a whole ten minutes!”  
“You mean you have two hours to get ready.” Haseul teases, seated on one of the dining table chairs and helping Changbin, Seungmin, and Felix make proper chocolates this time. “Don’t you have something else important you need to prepare?” 
“No, I can just wing it.” Minho dismisses to which Chan immediately laughs at, catching the younger boy’s panicked expression. 
“Sure you do.” Seungmin dryly responds, to which everyone topples over in laughter. 
past: November 1905
“You’ll see me again in five years, at least from your point of view.” You assure Minho from 1905 right before you leave. Jisung’s apologizing again about the incident last time but you’re quick to hug him and effectively shut him up. “The one you’ll meet in 1910 is going to be a little different, though, a little younger.” 
“But it’s still you.” 
You smile at this. “Yeah, still me.” 
Minho wants to tell you so badly that he’s met another version of you while you were away, someone older, but he quickly pushes the thought at the back of his head. Is this how you feel holding back spoilers from him? Instead, he ops to tease you. “You know, when people usually meet, it’s not as backwards as us.” When you raise an eyebrow at him, he continues, “You keep meeting me from the past and I’ve met you from the future countless of times. Even if culture’s going to be different in the future, I’m pretty sure this is still not how it goes there.” 
Finally, understanding, you let out a laugh, hitting his side playfully. “Definitely not.” You agree sheepishly. “But I think that makes it even more special. It makes you wait until we’re in the same time, right?” 
Minho nods. “What date are you going back to again?” 
“February 29, 2020. Why?” 
He says nothing else on it but bids you goodbye with one last hug instead. “Nothing. I’ll see you again soon...or another version of you.” 
“And I’ll see future you.” You chuckle before disappearing. 
present: February 29, 2020 
You come back to all the lights in Minho’s apartment turned off at the present. You hear whispers and the soft clicking of a lighter as well, prompting you to follow the noise outside. 
“I think it’s better if Changbin doesn’t hold the cake, don’t you think?” You recognize Haseul’s loud voice even from the hallways, fueling your curiosity even further. 
A slight pause then follows before you hear Chan agree, “Yeah. Hyunjin, you hold the other cake.” 
“Lix, you’re stepping on my foot.” That’s Jisung, you know by the way he’s always whiny when he complains. 
“Oh shit, sorry!” 
“Everyone, quiet! Y/N’s on their way!” Nari scolds and the hushes then quickly fall silent once you reach the kitchen, flipping the light switch on the hallway to the sound of party poppers exploding right in front of you. Only then do you see the big ‘CONGRATULATIONS Y/N!’ banner hanging right above everyone standing in a line with cake, hats, and trumpets. 
“Um?” You raise an eyebrow at everyone, breaking out into an uncontrollable grin. “What’s with all this?” 
Minho of your time then walks over to you with a Toblerone cake, carefully protecting two candles from the breeze that enters through the windows. “Chan and Eunhye insisted on a party so...congrats on finishing your thesis!” 
Over his shoulder, said vampire and immortal immediately shake their heads in denial. “It’s his idea!” Eunhye mouths to you with a smirk, making you chuckle.
You then turn to Minho with a smile. “I haven’t even finished writing it yet.” You point out only for your best friend to shrug nonchalantly. “And my graduation’s in a month.”  
“Yeah, we can work on that once everyone’s out of the apartment.” He suggests. “Now, just blow on the candles first, Seungmin’s arms are about to fall off waiting to take a picture.” 
You briefly apologize to Seungmin on the side with a sheepish laugh, blowing on the cake’s candles after to the many snaps of his film camera. “Thank you for all this. I really appreciate it, you guys!” You thank your guests after, approaching them with Minho on your side this time. 
“We can call you Professor now, right?” Hyunjin playfully asks, elbowing you gently on your side. 
“It makes me sound really old.” You pout, making him laugh. “In a few years.” 
“Three years.” Shiyeon coughs to which Minho immediately glares them down for. 
Catching this gesture, you decide on purposely ignoring it for now. You’ll have to ask Shiyeon what they mean with that later. “Anyway, let’s eat. Have you guys been here long?” 
“Not really but I’m already starving!” Soojung exclaims, passing you a plate and utensils. Next to her, Felix and Chan instinctively open up all the take-out boxes of food for everyone to dig in. 
“Alright, let’s eat!” 
present: March 1, 2020 
Minho kicks everyone out after by the strike of midnight, when all the food’s been devoured and the party games have been played at least twice. Surprisingly, even Jisung and Jeongin were directed outside by Minho at this time, which you immediately ask him about once the two boys are out of the door. “Don’t those two live here?” You joke with a dry chuckle. “You don’t have to kick them out so we can work.” 
“They’ll come back later.” Minho gently shuts the door before turning to you as you stand with your arms crossed in front of your chest, a genuinely curious expression on your face. “I just...need a moment with you.” 
You pretend to take a step back with your best dramatic expression of fear. “Oh my God, you’re going to kill me after eight years of friendship, right?” 
“What? No.” Minho furrows his brows at this, making you laugh. “It’s just...fuck, now I’m off-tracked.” 
You giggle this time, loosening your arms in front of you. “What is it, Minho?” 
There have been times, both in the past and present though rare, when Minho has looked nervous in front of you. The last time he was, from what you can remember, was when he was about to tell you that he accidentally killed the squirrel in the apartment’s back garden but even then, he wasn’t as nervous as he is now—fiddling with the hem of his blue sweater for a brief moment before finally taking the courage to step closer to you. “I-I, um—” He stammers out, one hand instinctively going up to his nape. “What I want to say is that...remember when I asked you in 1592 about how I know you?” 
“You just teased me about that last week.” You roll your eyes in an attempt to ease the sudden awkwardness, only to make it even worse for Minho. With this, your expression immediately contorts into worry. “What about it?” 
“Then in 1905, where you just came back from, you told me we’ll meet in the right time eventually...” He continues after a while, smiling back when you do reassuringly. “In between those centuries, of course, y-you—you came in for your college homework and your Masteral’s but there was also...there was also someone else.” 
This unexpected turn drops something heavy on your stomach, your smile unconsciously faltering. Minho wants to snicker but, knowing you, you’ll probably think of him cold if he does so he takes in a deep breath and tries his best to continue with less stutters this time. “Don’t be too sad, it’s still you, just a few months in the future.” He assures with a chuckle, hands instinctively going up to your sides to rub your arms comfortingly. Your eyes widen at this in response and you freeze in his touch. “Anyway, July 2020 Y/N just told me to do something tonight, if that’s okay.” 
It takes you a moment to respond but Minho patiently waits, holding back his laugh by biting his lip down. He’s reading your thoughts as they go into overdrive. Is this how you feel when I hide the future from you before? You internally ask to which he nods at. “U-Um, so...what are you going to do?”
“Just tell you that I’ve been in love with you for a long time.” Minho finally confesses, sighing in relief once he’s gotten the words out surprisingly well. “And if you’d like to go out for a trip after your graduation—and not the time travel trip, this time so we can be together right.” 
There’s more to it, actually, Minho has a whole paper written and rehearsed for a span of almost three centuries but he figures you’ll find out about it eventually. He could tell you about how he’s been in love with every version of you that he’s met in the past another time or maybe you already know it. 
“So?” He asks after a while when you don’t speak verbally. Your thoughts are still muddled and your heartbeat’s a little too fast for his liking but he holds any impulsive urge he might have in for your sake. “What do you say?” 
You purse your lips once, mustering up a relieved smile at him after. “You already met me from the future this time—which I commend you for, by the way, because you’ve one-upped me again this time!—so I think you already know the answer to that.” 
Tumblr media
epilogue
past: July 1799
You know full well that you’re not supposed to travel back in time for personal reasons, especially not for the reason you’re coming into 1799 to see a past Minho for, but you figure that you’re already in your university’s faculty roster. If I get caught, you think to yourself as you easily spot Minho with Chan at an art exhibit in Paris, the professors will probably understand. 
“Minho! Chan!” You call with your hand above your head waving frantically at the two, catching theirs and a few patrons’ attentions. You don’t mind the extra attention as you approach him, though, since they did instinctively made way for you because of it. “Hello there, you two!” 
“Hi, Y/N!” Chan greets you happily, giving you a side hug. “Aren’t you back too soon?” 
But knowing full well that you’re probably not the same one the two met last time, Minho smirks in amusement as he eyes your choice of clothes and asks, “And where did you come from? By the clothes, me from the future probably doesn’t know you’re here.” 
“Yeah, I picked out my own clothes for today. Anyway, I won’t be here long.” You roll your eyes with a chuckle. “I’m from July 2020 and I’m not here for any academic work this time! I just wanted to ask you a quick favor.” 
From what you’ve detailed in your own journals, the last time you met from this particular Minho’s point of view was when you were doing a paper on the Baroque movement for one of your college classes. 
“What is it?” He asks you anyway, his body turned away from the painting that he and Chan have been previously admiring as he gives you his full attention. 
Judging from the amount of times you’ve visited him (and the different versions of you he’s meet as well), his future self seems to agree on your requests all the time. 
“I can’t tell you much but please prepare something on February 29, 2020!” You answer, your watch beeping on your side to remind you that it’s almost time to leave. “And make sure to mention me! Remember, Y/N from July 2020!” 
Before he could ask about it, further, however, you were already gone. 
“What do you think that was about, Chan?” Minho asks the older vampire instead. 
But Chan simply shrugs, hands going deeper in his pockets as he thinks. “No idea.” He admits in equal confusion. “Guess we’ll have to see in three hundred years.” 
219 notes · View notes
finitepeace · 3 years
Text
this week i read...
Darling, Keep the Lights On (Until I Get Home) by capsicleironman  💙
Summary: When Steve Rogers is awoken from the ice early, he is assigned as the personal assistant to Tony Stark, the man on TV with the strange glowing light in his chest. The plan was simple - protect and gain intel. It was supposed to be just another job, but then again, nothing in Steve's life has ever gone according to plan.
Iron Man 2 Divergence where Steve ends up working for Tony instead of Natasha, and his interest first in the arc reactor and then in Tony himself, leads him through the events of the Avengers, Iron Man 3, and Captain America 2.
17k words 
It's Only Half Past (The Point of Oblivion) by LadyHabren (equalopportunityobsessor)
Summary: "I think it's generally agreed that all of Steve's senses are powered up by the serum? He can hear people whispering on the other side of the room, probably sees a hell of a lot further, etc.
But there are definite downsides. How does Steve control this side effect of the serum?"
Captain America is more than a man - he is a hero, he is an ideal, he is pure muscle held together by patriotism and moral fibre... And not even Captain America can fight it when his own brain turns against him.
4k, sentinel/guide au, not set in mcu, 
Do-Over by gottalovev  💙
Summary: Steve woke up six months ago into a future that leaves him indifferent. There is work, and not much else. His current mission is a basic search and rescue operation to retrieve an American who was kidnapped by a terrorist group ten days ago. He won't let the fact that the hostage is Howard's son be a distraction.
14k words, ironman 1 - 2 but with steve on it!, 
Calls Me Home by steve-capsicle-rogers (adorable_lab_rat)
Summary: Tony can't help but notice the far away look on Steve's face. The visible pain and loss. It wasn't right and giving Steve back everything he'd lost was the right choice. The right thing. And honestly Tony didn't do the right thing near enough.
9k words, post avenger 1, tony time travels to victory day with steve to make him happy 
Memorial by hanyou_elf
Summary: Here rests in honored glory an American Soldier known but to God.
Steve visits Arlington's Tomb of the Unknown Soldier in lieu of visting the tombs of those he's lost.
600+ words, steve visits his grave and tony supports 
Damaged by orphan_account
Summary: Prompt: Can you write a story where Tony is having heart problems again even after the shrapnel and arc reactor is removed, like he needs a pacemaker or something please? :)
Steve is worried about Tony after the doctor tells them Tony needs a pacemaker. Tony being Tony decides to build something better.
2k words, arc reactor + health problem 
Warning by laireshi
Summary: Tony's left arm hurts.
100 words, angst post-civil war au 
Told You Dirty Jokes Until You Smiled by ChibiSquirt  💙
Summary: Steve was waiting at light, casually checking out the man in the car behind him, when his phone pinged.
75k words. WIP T_T . steve is cap but tony isnt ironman (yet?). steve is awaken before ironman 1 and meets tony, proceed to have friends with benefits arrangement... 
blood, Lies, and Love by Ridley160
Summary: When Steve Rogers volunteered for Project Rebirth they told him they would make him a hero. No one bothered to tell him that the serum would change him into a monster that needed to feed on the blood of the living for survival. Now he has woken up 70 years in a future where there are more like him and his affliction is now seen as gift. Only Steve is convinced that he is at his core still just a monster.
Then he meets the brilliant, quirky and charismatic Tony Stark, the only person in this crazy new world that seems to understand Steve's misgivings about what he is, but Tony is haunted by something. A secret he has carefully guarded for many years that forced him to push everyone away.
33k words in 13 chapters, steve is cap + a vampire but tony isnt ironman, 
Blood Loss by wisia
Summary: The serum really did work a miracle. It created Captain America, and Tony would like the serum to work a miracle on him too. If only he didn’t fall in love.
5k words, set in captain america 1st avenger, tony is scientist/adventurer looking for a cure for his heart problem 
scientific Heresy by antigrav_vector
Summary: In the process of running the particle accelerator in his basement and fixing the arc reactor, Tony finds himself flung into the past where he has to take on a fight not his own if he wants to get home to stop Vanko. At least he had a chance to replace the old rector that had been killing him with the new one before everything went sideways... But now he has no choice but to face off with family, friends, and old heroes, and none of that sounds remotely appealing. Well, okay, getting to meet them all during their glory days kinda does.
But as it turns out, they're not exactly what he imagined, and his path home is a lot longer than he'd hoped it would be.
And a lot more complicated.
34k words in 12 chapters, time travel au @ cap 1 and ironman 2, steve/tony/bucky 
we will meet in another life by theappleppielifestyle
Summary: Tony is there instead of Howard during Project Rebirth. He ends up following Steve into the Howling Commandos, into the Atlantic ocean and into the 21st century.
6k words, canon divergence. 
Keep on Beating by itsallAvengers
Summary: There were an awful lot of things Steve loved about Tony. But one thing in particular Steve could never get enough of was his heartbeat.
6k words, self-sacrificing tony strikes again and steve is upset.. so tony comes to a solution... 
Coming Up Roses by NobodysBloodyPrincess  💙
Summary: Those with a death wish referred to the High Commander’s infatuation with the late Tony Stark as an ‘obsession.’ They were wrong. It had to be more than that, after all there was no word for what the High Commander was about do in the name of making things right.
No one gets a redo of life… no one except High Commander Rogers that is. Everything is coming up Roses and Sunshine for him. After all, he has a dream and it’s going to come true.
41k words in 3 chapters, beautiful but a bit dark and sad, just like the author said: “‘i’ll be with you till the end of line’ but stony”, definitely one of the best fic i’ve read because THEY ARE HAPPY T_T 
The One With Bucky's Biggest Fan by justanotherpipedream
Summary: Steve still can’t believe how long it took for him to notice. It wasn’t a secret really, just something that no one had cared to ask...it honestly took Rhodey pulling him aside and pulling out an old photo album, before Steve really understood.
Tony Stark was a Bucky Barnes fan.
(aka The one where Tony is the biggest Bucky Barnes fanboy, Steve is a supportive boyfriend, and Bucky is perplexed by it all.)
2k words, it’s all in the summary 
Sins of the Mother by skullshy  💙
Summary: All she could see when her eyes closed was Steve’s face in the courtroom. Stern, pained— with that fucking all-American self-righteousness.
Toni wondered for years whether it would have made a difference. Told him that she was pregnant, that Ultron was to protect their baby, and how sorry she was.
On her worst days, she imagined it wouldn’t have mattered.
23k words in 23 chapters, female tony stark, civil war (or age of ultron?) canon divergence 
So this is bonded life by Captainstark12
Summary: Steve had been protecting the human village from hydra creatures like him for five years. And now he was ready to take his prize as he had the privilege of choosing an omega to bear his child. Hopefully his chosen omega human would want him back as much as he wanted him
4k in 6 chapters, mythology au 
I don't think there's a manual for this by itsallAvengers
Summary: So. His son can stick to things, apparently.
If only Tony had realised this before he'd caught him hanging off the 89th floor of the tower.
Well. Parenting was never going to be a smooth road, was it?
2k words, stony adopts peter parker and then they become superfamily 
For Your Eyes Only by SarahHBE
Summary: Every soldier looks forward to mail call. But Alpha Steve Rogers gets a big surprise with the letter his Omega, Tony Stark, has sent him.
2k words, explicit bcs of sexual content 
It Was Just A Matter Of Time by babynative
Summary: The clock was ticking. And then, black.
719 words, civil war canon divergence, angst 
This Can't Be The Last by MusicalLuna
Summary: Hours after a mission ends, Tony's heart starts to race.
1k words, tony had a heart attack, but not angst! 
The Billionaire and the Army Captain by Neverever
Summary: Facing finanical ruin and needing to care for his sick daughter, Steve Rogers agrees to marry Tony Stark, who needs to get married by his 30th birthday to inherit. It's just a job for Steve until he starts to fall for the enigmatic billionaire.
12k words, non-powers au, 
Adopt by greenteeth  💙
Summary: Steve's life is the same as usual. He goes to work, fights super villains, banters with other Avengers and goes home to an empty apartment. Until the son of an old friend shows up asking for help, well sex first, then help. Suddenly Steve is married, fighting super villains, worrying what Obadiah Stane and coming home to Tony most nights of the week.
42k words in 17 chapters, ABO, tony is not iron man, the story is complete but it’s a part of series that seems to never see the light T_T 
The Act of Creation Will Be Your Salvation  by scifigrl47  💙
Summary: When Tony Stark was seventeen years old, he built his first AI. On that day, he ceased to be his father's creation, and became a creating force in his own right.
That one act likely saved his life, and not always in the most obvious ways.
84k words in 8 chapters, stony but mostly looking through his AI bots a.k.a. jarvis and dum-e, definitely one of the best fics ever! 
Bewitched, Body and Soul by iam93percentstardust
Summary: Almost ten years after joining the British Army, Steve Rogers returns to his childhood home after his mother's death. The house seems quiet in a way that it's rarely been. But the peace is shattered when his oldest friend stumbles into his home and into his life, seeking an escape from an arranged marriage to a cruel lord. Steve provides that escape but finds himself engaged to be married instead. This wouldn't be a problem - except that Steve is, always has been, and always will be deeply in love with Tony Stark.
16k words, regency AU, ABO,  the classic stony misunderstanding trope 
Right place, right time by hkandi, ralsbecket
Summary: An alternate take on the Captain America: The First Avenger movie. Tony is working with his dad to help out the SSR on this new project, though he and Steve happen to run into each other before that, and sparks fly from the start.
8k, CA: First avenger AU with tony stark present
30 notes · View notes
writer-k-pop · 4 years
Text
417 Years
너는 그들이 무엇을 할 수 있는지 모른다. You don't know what they can do.
Description: After 417 years of waiting, Joshua finally sees you again only it's vastly different from how he imagined it. On one hand, he has the joys of having you with him again but on the other, his protective nature wants to do everything and anything to keep you from what you have been running from for your entire life. Warnings: Mentions of injuries, stitching, death but nothing detailed, swearing Genre: Angst, Immortal!Joshua x Immortal!FemReader Word Count: 8.5k [I think this is one of my longest?]
Seventeen Masterlist | Masterlist
Tumblr media
(y/n) stands in front of me again, her hair a little crazy like she's just been fighting or doing some martial arts. But it's not her appearance that stops me. It's her eyes. It's always her eyes. They pierce into mine, constantly searching for anything and everything at the same time.
"Don't look for me." She says, not moving a muscle.
"Why not?" I find myself asking.
She sighs and I feel the breath against my chest as if she's laying on my chest. "Because I don't know when I'll see you again." She responds.
"How would you know if I did look?" I smirk, thinking I've caught her in a trap.
(y/n) smirks wider, "You won't because immortals can't break promises." She holds her left hand and the ring on her middle finger sparkles, "And you already promised."
I feel my shoulders sag as the realization hits me like a ton of bricks. "When you do return, will you remember me?" I can't help but ask.
She chuckles and walks towards me, hand outstretched for mine. She's going to say 'How could I forget?' It's what she says every time when I ask that question in this dream.
"Help."
Suddenly, I'm standing in a room of endless dark grey walls. (y/n)'s gone but I can still hear her call echoing from every direction.
"Help me."
I turn to the left then to the right, searching for her but the grey space remains unchanging.
"Joshua!"
I jerk awake and jerkily look around.
"What the hell?" I whisper, my senses finally recognizing the plush couch underneath me and racing game sounds coming from the TV.
"You good?" Woozi asks, glancing between me and the TV.
Sitting up, I run my hands over my face, "No? Yes? Maybe?" I rattle off, unsure of exactly how I'm feeling. My heart's still racing in worry but I know it was just a dream.
"You dreamed of her again?" Woozi guesses, returning his gaze to the TV just in time to dodge another car.
"Yeah but," I pause, trying to find the right words.
"But what?" Woozi probes.
"It, it was different." I answer, placing my forehead against the palms of my hands, massaging it slightly.
"Different how?" Woozi quickly presses a button on his controller, "It's always the same dream, it never changes."
"Josh's dream changed?" Jeonghan walks into the room having overheard the latter part of the conversation.
I nod, "The ending. She just yelled for help and then I was a weird grey space and then she yelled my name and I woke up."
"Huh." Jeonghan and Woozi say at the same time with looks of slight wonder on their faces.
"Maybe it changed because you took a nap at 8pm." Jeonghan pats my shoulder, "Anyway, DoKyeom asked if you could help with the trash down stairs."
I shake away the thoughts of my dream, "Yeah, yeah. Can you guys get the house trash?"
Woozi nods, "We'll set it outside the door for you."
I roll my eyes as I stand, "Yeah okay, one of these days we're going to set up a schedule for who takes out the tra-"
"Yeah, yeah, someday in our long long lives we'll do that." Jeonghan nags back and pushes me towards the door.
I chuckle at my longest friend and close the front door behind me. Three feet in front of me is another door that leads to a staircase on the outside of the building leading down to the road. A couple feet away, on my right is the staircase that leads down into the clock and watch shop, mainly watches now-a-days, that I've been running for hundreds of years.
After I phased, some 600 years ago, I learned that I couldn't stay in one place for too long. But with all the moving I had to find something to bring in a little income. Though every profession at that time required a lot of packing up and moving. Not like these days where you can just take a brief case and a laptop.
I soon found that clock/watch making and fixing piqued my interest enough that I started my own business. When I needed to move, it was easy enough. All I had to find was a building to set up shop in and everything else from my shop fit into three large boxes. In the early days, I would often be reminded of how ironic it was for an immortal to work in that type of shop. I mean, my job was making and fixing an object that reminded people of how little time they had left while I had an unlimited amount. Though it's a sad realization, my love for the craft hasn't changed.
With my shop, I traveled the world and even gained a few friends (now housemates) along the way.
Jeonghan was the first. He had phased three years after I did but we didn't cross paths until 20 years later. We became close because our immortal status and began living together.
Then there was Woozi. He joined Jeonghan and I around 450 years ago. Then for the next couple hundred years, it was just the three of us. Moving to a city, working the  shop for 20 years or so, and then moving onto another city or country.
128 years ago, we ran into Dokyeom and Seungkwan. Dokyeom phased 10 years prior and Seungkwan had only 5 years prior.
And since then, we've been a group. Living and figuring out our way through the world together. At some point, Jeonghan and Seungkwan decided to work in different fields and bring in some extra cash. Jeonghan got his doctor's education and license and Seungkwan makes the spunkiest of business men. The rest of us still enjoy our work at the shop.
We've been in our current city for a few years and were lucky enough to find this shop/home combo building.
Reaching the bottom steps of the back staircase, I can't help but think about the last time I had that dream. It's been a couple years since but I can't shake the weird feeling that this change means something.
I push open the creaky door and mentally remind myself to WD-40 that this weekend.
"Back here, Josh!" Dokyeom calls from the back room.
I make my way back and am greeted by Dokyeom's backside as he struggles to pull out the overly stuffed trash bag.
"A little help, please?" He grunts taking a second to glance back at me.
"Why didn't you wait for me?" I ask as I hold the trash can down.
"I thought I could do it by myself but someone had to over stuff the trash, again." He gives me a pointed look once the bag is free.
I shrug, "We're saving money on trash bags this way."
Dokyeom ties the top of the bag, "But wrecking my back." He complains.
"That's your problem. You should get a better back." I joke with a smile.
"Good one, hyung." Dokyeom pushes the bag into my legs. "Oh, by way, that Mr. Wilson guy brought in another batch of bands. He said to do them the same as the other one."
I nod, "Did he say when he wanted them done?"
Dokyeom shakes his head, "I can call now though and ask."
"If you would, and then lock up while I take these out to the street." I suggest.
"No problem!" He salutes me and disappears out front to find Mr. Wilson's contact information.
Picking up the trash bag, it's heavier that I thought and I struggle to lift it off the floor. I lug it to the front door as walking along the street would be much easier than trying to walk up 23 steps with it. I still have to climb the steps for the house trash but that's easy.
The sky has darkened and the streetlights are in full brightness, lighting up spotlights along the street. Once the heavy shop trash bag is resting just to the side of our house stairway, I take a moment to catch my breath and look up at the sky. If there's one thing I miss about the other places we've lived, it'd have to be the clear night skies where all the stars are visible. Here in the city, it's just too bright. As I fail to locate a single star, I can't help but let my mind wander towards (y/n).
The way she held my hands so tenderly. The way her eyes were always searching for answers, even when she was looking into mine. The way my name rolled so easily off her tongue. It's been 417 years since I last physically saw her and though she was right in that I could never break my promise to not look for her, it never stopped me from hoping she would cross his path again. Like now.  
Knowing it's all just wishful thinking, I take in a deep breath and climb the outer stairs, punch in the pass code to our front door, and pickup the trash bags that Jeonghan and Woozi collected from the house. With an empty mind, I place them next to the shop's trash bag. With one last look at the sky, I turn to go back inside.
Just as I step onto the first step, I hear a sound, like the one a sheet of metal makes when it's bent quickly, from my right.
I look up just as someone falls out of a flash of grey light and rams backwards into the side of the next door building. The shock plants my feet into the concrete and all I can do is blink at the unmoving figure sitting slumped against the wall.
'Did they just- No. Did they?' My thoughts try to make sense of the situation because I know there are time-jumpers but they almost always appear in more discreet areas and are almost always standing when they land.
Then the figure groans and attempts to move but only manages to tilt their head to the left. That instantly sets my body in motion.
Walking closer, I realize that it's a woman who's been badly injured. Her arms have gashes and one of her hands is pressed to her stomach while the other clutches a bloody dagger. Scanning her legs, it's a miracle that they are injury free, at least from what I can see. An old leather backpack sits a few inches from her body. I hold back a gasp and cautiously kneel down next to her.
"Hey, are you ok-" My voice disappears when my eyes catch a glimpse of the 1-inch scar sitting where her hairline meets the back of her neck on the right side. My mind automatically replays the feeling of it under my fingers as they run across the surface. i know exactly how every ridge feels. I know exactly how she got the scar because well, I was partly to blame for it.
"(y/n)." I whisper her name before I can stop myself. It's her. She's here. In front of me.
'And bleeding, you dumb ass.' My mind reminds me quite urgently.
I shake her shoulder once more and she groans but doesn't open her eyes.
"Hey, hey, (y/n). Open your eyes for me." I gently coax her and shake her again.
Her head slowly turns towards me and her eyes open ever so slightly. A small smile of relief makes it way onto her face and she swallows hard.
"So this is where I ended up. Joshua..." (y/n) trails off and her eyes close once again. The knife slips from her hand and clatters onto the concrete.
I try shaking her awake again but it's no use, she's passed out. Now the panic is starting to set in.
I have to get her inside. But how? I can go get one of the guys, but then I have to leave her. I don't want to leave her.
"Josh, everything okay?" Dokyeom calls from the front door and relief lifts a small weight off my shoulders.
"Keep the door open." I instruct and quickly scoop (y/n) into my arms.
"What's going on?" Seungkwan appears behind Dokyeom just as I start to climb the steps.
"Hyung, what are yo-"
"Seungkwan, go get the medical tarp and lay it out on my bed. And tell Jeonghan to get his first aid kit. The bigger one." I cut Dokyeom off, making sure not to jostle (y/n)'s body too much.
Dokyeom holds open the door for me while I slide into the landing before heading to the inner door that leads into the house.
"He wants you to do what?" I hear Woozi question when the door opens. "Why- Oh. Oh god." Woozi stares as I make my way in.
I rush towards my room with Woozi, Jeonghan, and Dokyeom close behind.
"What happened?" Jeonghan asks, immediately starting to assess (y/n)'s wounds as soon as I set her on my bed.
"That was quick." Seungkwan says slightly surprised.
"I had it ready." Jeonghan replies, still waiting for my reply to his original question.
I realize how hard I'm breathing and try to slow it down but fail. "I, I don't know. I was taking out the trash and then she popped out of nowhere. Like that." I explain, trying desperate to find a way to help her but with my medical license nonexistent, I'm just a sitting duck.
Jeonghan's hands are pressing some gauze onto her stomach where the deepest gash seems to be. But my attention is on her face, silently begging for her eyes to open.
"Did she have anything else with her?" Jeonghan questions while looking over her arms.
I try to focus my racing thoughts on the question and barely formulate a sentence. "Uh, uh, she was gripping a knife and she had a backpack."
"Where are they now?" Jeonghan asks, keeping his voice calm.
"I, I left them in the street." I answer, realizing how not good that is.
Jeonghan nods, "Okay. Dokyeom, Seungkwan, Woozi, go fetch her stuff and clean or cover any of the blood if there is any." The three nod and quickly leave the room.
"What can I do?" I finally ask, kneeling down next to Jeonghan.
He glances over at me but I can't take my eyes of (y/n)'s face, not wanting to miss a moment of her presence.
"I can do this by myself. You don't have to watch if it's-"
"I'm staying." I tell him in determination, "So tell me what to do."
Jeonghan looks into my eyes for a couple more seconds before taking a breath. "Okay. We're going to have to stitch up the cut on her stomach. I looked earlier and nothing vital seems to have been touched. It's just really deep. Get yourself a pair of gloves from the kit and bring out the sutures and needle pack."
Because Jeonghan spent one of our recent moves learning to be a doctor, and then becoming one, we (more him than I) finish within 25 minutes. Once we've dressed that wound, we move onto the rest of her injuries.
"Go grab her a shirt of yours." Jeonghan instructs while pulling out scissors from his kit.
Suddenly hating the idea of having Jeonghan see her like that, I stop him. "You are not-"
"Josh, I sent the others out because I didn't think (y/n) would want everyone in this household to see her bare." Jeonghan defends his actions, "And because I'm the only one in this household who's an actual doctor, I think she'll be okay with me."
I slowly release his hand as his plan paints the perfect picture.
"Go get a t-shirt of yours." Jeonghan repeats and gets to work cutting off (y/n)'s torn and bloody shirt.
As I turn towards my dresser, a small seed of gratitude for Jeonghan and his forward thinking plants itself in my mind. I pick the softest shirt I own and when I turn back around, (y/n)'s shirt is in a shredded pile on the floor and Jeonghan is wiping away the blood from her skin.
I find myself trailing over her body, taking note of the new scars and I wonder how she got those. 400 years is a long time and filled with so many untold stories.
Laying the shirt on the nightstand, I pick up a clean towel and begin cleaning the arm opposite of Jeonghan, which happens to be her left arm. Careful to avoid her open wounds, we clean her in silence. A sparkle from her hand brings my attention to the ring I had missed.
The ring I gave her.
Instinctively, my hand grips hers and I look at her face. Her closed eyes and relaxed muscles make her look so peaceful but I worry about the pain and fear she must've felt before I found her.
All these years and she still wears the ring that I gave her. My heart swells with love for this woman and it makes tears line my eyes.
Jeonghan lays a hand on my shoulder from behind, silently asking me to move so he can dress her wounds. I nod and move a few steps away but I don't let go of her hand. I can't bring myself to do it.
He works in silence, bandaging each cut and then wrapping a protective layer of gauze around it.
"Let's get her off this tarp and under the covers." Jeonghan says once he finishes.
I nod, reluctant to let go of her hand but I kind of need it. I scoop (y/n) again in my arms, extremely careful not to bust open any stitches, while Jeonghan slides the tarp out from under her and pulls back the covers of my bed.
"Before you lay her down completely, let's get the shirt over her." Jeonghan comments as I move to set her down.
"Good idea." I reply and set her legs on the bed but keep a hold of her upper body. Her head lulls into my chest and I feel my heart skip three too many beats. After some odd finagling, we slip the shirt down her body and I lay her back into the pillows. Absentmindedly, I fix her hair so it lays somewhat neatly and out of her face. Jeonghan picks up the bin of red tinted water and walks out of the room without a word. I sit on the edge of my bed, clasping (y/n)'s left hand between both of mine and I just sit there, watching her, praying that she'll wake up soon. I sit there as Woozi and Jeonghan return to clean up the rest of the mess. I sit there as Dokyeom and Seungkwan stand in the doorway whispering to each other presumably about me. I sit there as the moon disappears and the sun brightens the sky. And through it all, neither (y/n) or I move a muscle.
"Hyung." Seungkwan says quietly from behind me.
I turn my head towards him slightly, wordlessly telling him that he has my attention.
"Jeonghan hyung made breakfast and told Woozi hyung and I to make sure that you eat something." He explains, "Please eat something with us. We can leave the door open so we'll hear her if she wakes up." He tries to reason with me, already guessing that I'd be reluctant to leave. "Please." Seungkwan pleads.
I glance back at (y/n)'s sleeping face and decide I should probably eat something before I, myself, pass out.
"Okay." I tell him and gently release her hand from mine. "Let me change and we'll go eat breakfast." And with joints as stiff as a plaster mask, I creak and pop everything in my body as I stand up to full height.
After I change out of my stained clothes, Seungkwan leads the way out of my bedroom and leaves the door wide open. Entering the dining room, just kitty corner to my room, Woozi is already seated and eating away.
"How is she?" He asks once Seungkwan and I take our respective seats.
"She's been the same all night." I answer grabbing some food for myself. "Did Dokyeom open the shop?" I wonder, glancing over at the time.
Seungkwan nodded, "And Jeonghan left like 30 minutes ago."
I nod shoving a forkful of whatever Jeonghan made into my mouth.
"I'm guessing I'll take your shift at the shop today then?" Woozi asks, resting his elbow on the table.
"If you could." I reply. "I don't know when I'll be able to get back. I trust you with all the customizations."
"Oh!" Seungkwan suddenly remembers something, "Dokyeom asked me to tell you that a Mr. Wilson needs his order done by next week."
"You trust me with that order?" Woozi inquires with a side glance at me.
I shrug, "It's the same as the last batch and you did fine on the ones that you did then, so in short, yes, yes I trust you with it."
As we fall into silence, an elephant begins to manifest itself in the room and it's further emphasized by Seungkwan throwing glances between Woozi and I.
"Spit it out Seungkwan." I set down my fork on the table and turn to face him. "Go ahead."
Seungkwan shrinks slightly having been caught. "I, it's just her."
"What about her?" I question.
"Is it really her?" He asks leaning towards me like he doesn't want anyone to hear.
"I think so." I answer him, picking up my fork again.
"How do you know?" Seungkwan continues to probe, "Like how do you know know?"
I give a side look and swallow, "I just know."
"But it's been like what 400 years? That's a long time." Seungkwan rambles, "What if she's just a reincarnation?"
Woozi makes a noise warning for Seungkwan to stop talking but it really doesn't bother me. It never has. Seungkwan and Dokyeom are a couple centuries behind so they weren't around when (y/n) was. They've only heard stories from us so they're curious. I understand that.
"She's not a reincarnation." I move some of the food around my plate, "She's got the scar and the ring I gave her. And her face hasn't changed one bit."
"Well, duh, we're immortal, we don't change no matter how old we are." Seungkwan sasses "Speaking of which, damn, you guys are old."
"So are you." I retort immediately.
"Not as old as you, Grandpa." Seungkwan jokes with a smile.
I roll my eyes, "Alright, youngen, does that mean you can do all the physically taxing chores because you're younger and your body is in better shape?" I threaten.
Panic crosses Seungkwan's features and he pushes out of his chair, "Oh, would you look at the time. I gotta run." He throws out excuses quickly making Woozi and I laugh. But the few seconds of joy don't last long.
"Hey, hyung..." Seungkwan calls for me, "Did... didn't we leave your door open?" He asks and our smiles immediately drop from our faces.
The chair legs scrape against the floor as I stand up, a wave of worries floods my mind.
"We left it open." I mumble and make my way to my now closed bedroom door. Turning the handle, it resists against me. Locked.
"Seungkwan, go get me my keys." I tell him quietly while listening for any noise behind my door but there's only silence. The fear of what I might find on the other side grows as Seungkwan returns with my keys. I quickly flip through them, searching for the right one. Finding it, I stick it in the handle, turn, and hear the lock retracting.
When I fling the door open, my bed is empty. I scan the room and find (y/n) standing next to my open window, staring back at me in fear.
"When did you wake up?" I ask in the softest voice I could manage while my insides are raging with emotions.
"J-just a few minutes ago." (y/n) stutters, her hand pressed against her stomach. "What year is it?"
"You don't know?" Seungkwan pipes up behind me, his curiosity very evident.
She shakes her head, "i was in 2018 but I can't tell where I am."
"Look, before I tell you anything, you probably shouldn't be standing." I step towards her, a hand offered for her stability. "You had a lot of cuts and we had to stitch up the one on your stomach."
"Joshua?" (y/n) whispers softly as I get closer, "So, so it wasn't a dream?"
I shake my head, only letting a small smile form, "It's me. You found me." Once I grab her free hand, she leans into me, her strength giving out. I gently wrap an arm around her waist and lead her over to the bed.
"Seungkwan, water." I simply state and I hear his footsteps retreat away.
"But I can't stay." She says abruptly as I lay her back on my bed.
"You have to. You're not well enough to go anywhere." I remind her .
"But I can't." She insists, though her body sinks happily into the mattress.
"Your body is saying otherwise, dear." I stroke her hair as Seungkwan walks in with a glass of water and a straw. I take it from him and help (y/n) take a few sips.
"I took the day off so if you need anything, I'll be outside." Seungkwan whispers to me before leaving us alone.
"He's new." (y/n) says once the door clicks shut.
"Just rest for now, I'll explain things when you're rested." I give her hand a small squeeze.
"Just answer this for me: what year is it?" She asks again, her eyes landing on mine, searching for an answer.
I sigh, immediately giving into her gaze, "2020."
"2 years." She does the simple math in her head, "Only two years. It's not enough time." (y/n) groans and attempts to sit up but I push her back down.
"You are not going anywhere." I demand, "You will have enough time after you rest. You need to rest."
(y/n) scrunches up her eyebrows, ready to fight me verbally but I add something I know she won't be able to resist.
"Plus, if you stay you can meet the two new kids we picked up and see Jeonghan. Otherwise I won't hear the end of it." I tell her and her eyes widen slightly.
"Two?" She repeats the number.
"This is a household of five now." I inform her, "But you won't be able to meet them until after you're rested."
I watch (y/n) fight with herself about whether or not she should leave but her curiosity about my life gets the better of her. Her shoulders relax under my hands and I pull away knowing she's surrendered.
A breeze from the still open window rushes past us, making (y/n) shiver. I quickly pull the covers over her before walking to the window.
"And what were you planning to do?" I ask as I close the window, "Jump? In your condition?"
(y/n) gives the smallest of shrugs, "I've done worse."
I have to bite my tongue to keep from asking the question that almost tumbled out of my mouth. Her eyes start to close as sleep starts to pull her under again.
"Just don't leave yet." I quietly beg her before placing a soft kiss to her forehead. When I pull back, she's fast asleep.
I spend a few more minutes kneeling by the bed, holding her hand, and just watching her sleep. Placing another kiss to the back of her hand, I leave the room but keep the door open. The others are just going to have to be quiet for the day.
For the rest of day, I try to relax while (y/n) sleeps but I don't do much besides sit on the couch with my ears on high alert for any sounds coming from my bedroom. Of course, there are no sounds. As the sun sets, Jeonghan walks into the house, briefcase in hand.
He nods in greeting and Seungkwan and I do the same.
"How is she?" Jeonghan inquires walking towards us.
"She woke up once but fell back asleep soon after." I inform him.
"I think she tried to escape through the window." Seungkwan quips and I throw him a look, having wanted to leave that bit of information out.
"She did... really?" Jeonghan is taken aback by the new information.
I take a deep breath, "I mean she was scared, had no idea where she was, wouldn't your first idea be to get out?"
"Touché." Jeonghan tilts his head to the side. "Where's Dokyeom and Woozi?" He looks around the empty area.
"Dokyeom's in his room and Woozi should be locking up the shop." I answer.
Jeonghan nods, "How are her dressings?"
"Last I checked they looked okay but I'm not the doctor." I answer honestly.
"Let me get changed and we can check together." Jeonghan chuckles.
"You're the doc." I throw my hands up in surrender to his directions.
"Is she going to stay awhile?" Seungkwan asks, "I have so many questions for her."
"I don't know how long she's staying. I just hope it's for a while." I tell him my own wishes.
When Jeonghan returns in a nice groutfit, we make our way to my room.
"You're awake!" Seungkwan says happily upon seeing (y/n) attempting to sit up in the bed. He rushes over and helps rearrange the pillows behind her.
"I just woke up." She smiles warmly at him.
"How do you feel?" I ask, coming to stand next to Seungkwan.
"I've been better but I definitely feel better than before." She answers, then turns towards Jeonghan. "I was told that I couldn't leave before saying hello to you."
Jeonghan smirks and rustles her hair, "No, the reason you couldn't leave yet is because I have to clear you."
(y/n)'s face contorts into confusion, "Clear me?"
"Doctor Jeonghan at your service." Jeonghan announces and dramatically bows to her.
"You. A doctor?" (y/n) just blinks at him in disbelief. Then chuckles before the pain stops her short. "Ow, fuck. Since when?"
Jeonghan takes immediate action and opens his medical kit before answering, "Like a couple decades ago, I think."
She nods as Jeonghan begins unwrapping some of her dressings, "Nice, nice. Well, very belated congrats."
Jeonghan snorts out a laugh, "Thank you very much." Then he continues his work.
"And you are?" (y/n) turns her attention to Seungkwan.
"Seungkwan." He answers brightly and holds out a hand which she gladly takes.
"And when did you join this circus household?" She asks a playful smile on her lips.
"Dokyeom and I joined some 120 years ago." Seungkwan says.
"We are not a circus." I defend, "If anything, it became a circus when these two showed up." I nudge Seungkwan.
"Hey Woozi, do you know if Jeonghan hyung is home yet? I have to ask him about the- Oh." Dokyeom pauses in the doorway before a big smile erupts on his face. "Hi, I'm Dokyeom. And you're (y/n). And we've heard so much about you." He rambles on making his way over in between Seungkwan and I.
I mentally facepalm with embarrassment but one look at (y/n)'s face makes it all dissipate. I can tell from her smile and the way her eyes look at the two that she already loves them. Relief over that fact washes over me, making me relax ever so slightly.
"Shoo." Joenghan simply states walking up behind the two youngest.
"Oh." Both of them say and quickly shuffle to the other side of the bed where Jeonghan was just a moment ago.
As the three of them chat, I watch Jeonghan carefully remove some gauze and pull back a bandage. The cut is clean and not as angry of a red which is good. Jeonghan also likes the way it's looking and covers it with a new bandage and gauze.
"I'm just gonna lift up your shirt to check your stomach." Jeonghan informs her but as he reaches for the covers, (y/n) pushes them off and lifts the shirt on her own accord.
"Whatever you gotta do, doc." She tells him with a sweet smile.
"Don't call me that." Jeonghan cringes at the nickname she's given him.
(y/n) cocks her head to the side, "I think it suits you very well, doc."
I stifle a laugh and Jeonghan throws me glare. My hands rise up in surrender. She's giggling when Jeonghan returns his attention to her and begins unwrapping the gauze.
She's seems to be in a better mood but I do know that she's used that mechanism before to hide something. I want to know what it is that she's hiding but I also want to soak in her happy presence for a little while longer.
"Alright, you're looking good." Jeonghan informs basically all of us, "Just don't do anything stupid like jump out of a window for a while until the stitches heal."
"How long is that?" (y/n) asks, suddenly more serious.
"At least two weeks." Jeonghan tells her, a little weary about her sudden seriousness.
(y/n) purses her lips in dissatisfaction.
"Why?" I ask raising an eyebrow in curiosity.
She meets my gaze and her eyes give away the lie she says. "I just thought my body could heal faster."
'That's too long.' Is what her eyes say.
"We're immortal not super human." Dokyeom comments.
"Dude, that makes no sense." Seungkwan slaps his shoulder.
"It makes sense!" Dokyeom defends himself.
"Are you hungry?" I ask, changing subjects.
She nods, "A little yeah."
"I'll go whip something up." Jeonghan says, gathering his supplies, "It's going to be soft foods and no complaining." He shoots (y/n) a look, knowing full well her history with food.
(y/n) pouts but doesn't say anything.
"So, where have you been hiding?" Dokyeom asks as Jeonghan leaves the room.
"Here and there." (y/n) shrugs, "I'm not that interesting though. I'm more interested in you two. What do you guys do?" She questions them, sitting up a bit straighter.
Satisfied that Dokyeom and Seungkwan will keep her company, I leave the room and join Jeonghan in the kitchen.
"She's hiding something, isn't she?" He asks when I enter.
I nod, "I think so."
"And she won't say it." He infers.
"I haven't asked yet." I reply.
"I can't believe after 400 years, she shows up like this." Jeonghan looks up at the ceiling for a moment, "400 years."
"Four hundred and seventeen to be exact." Woozi corrects him joining us. "Are the kids keeping her company?"
"Yupp, talking her ear off." I tell him, then smile, "Though I don't think she minds at all."
"She's (y/n), of course she doesn't mind. She lives for active talkers like them." Jeonghan states, "She loves the stories."
"But won't tell hers." I sadly add.
"She will but only to the right person." Jeonghan reminds me, opening a cabinet for a small bowl. He pours some apple sauce into it and sets it on the tray with a plate of scrambled eggs. "Dinner is served." He hands me the tray.
I take the tray with a nod. "Off I go."
"Good luck, skipper." Woozi jokes as I walk by him and towards my room. The sounds of a lively conversation float out of the doorway and put a smile on my face.
Walking in, Dokyeom and Seungkwan pay little attention to me and are focused on (y/n) who's digging around in her bag for something.
"Where's my knife?" (y/n) wonders, her hand is still moving around in her bag.
"Not in there." I inform her, "Woozi put it away for now."
"Oooh, what is that?" She asks, noticing the tray in my hands and lifting her arms up for it.
"Scrambled eggs and apple sauce." I tell her and guide the tray onto her lap. Without another word, she picks up the fork and begins shoveling eggs into her mouth.
"Don't eat too fast." Dokyeom worries, "You might get a tummy ache."
(y/n) gives him a smile, "No worries, I've been a lot worse and eaten a lot more. I've got a stomach of steel. Just ask-" She stops and her eyes fill with immense sadness.
"Did you get to explain your little trick to them?" I quickly change the subject.
"Trick?" Seungkwan repeats, "What trick? I like tricks."
"Yeah, what trick?" Dokyeom pesters.
(y/n) swallows, any trace of sadness gone in a split second. "I hadn't had the chance before you came in with dinner."
"So what's the trick?" Dokyeom asks again.
"Well, have you heard of immortals with extra stuff?" She wonders and I chuckle at her use of 'extra stuff.'
Dokyeom and Seungkwan shake their heads.
"It's on the rarer side, but I happen to be an immortal with extra stuff. Though I do believe I am the last one now." (y/n) explains, "I'm what they used to call a time-jumper. What that means is that I can sort of jump through time."
Dokyeom gasps and covers his mouth.
"You can time travel?" Seungkwan clarifies.
"Yes and no." (y/n) answers before scooping some apple sauce into her mouth. "I can time travel, yes, but I can only go forward, never backwards. Hence 'time-jumper' and not 'time-traveler.'"
"And hyung knows." Dokyeom points to me.
"I know." I tell him.
"So that's why you asked what year it was." Seungkwan reasons, thinking back to earlier in the day.
"Exactly." She gives him a thumbs up, "When I jump, it could be as soon as 6 months later or I've jumped as long as 10 years later. It can get very disorienting at times."
"I bet." Dokyeom nods along, "Do you end up in the same place or?"
(y/n) shakes her head, "Depends, but usually I end up somewhere different."
"That's so cool." Seungkwan remarks, "I wish I could do that."
"Maybe one day, if we still exist." She smiles but there's a tone of sadness to it. Then she abruptly turns to me, "Where's my knife?"
"I told you-"
"I know what you said." (y/n) cuts me off with a bit of urgency, "But I kind of need it now."
"Why?" I question.
"I just need it." She repeats herself, "For my sanity."
I sigh, giving into her demands, "Seungkwan, can you go get it? And Dokyeom, can you take her dishes to the kitchen?"
"Why can't you do it?" Dokyeom whines and I almost, almost, yell at him but hold back.
"Because I need to talk to (y/n) alone." I say through clenched teeth. In the century that we've lived together, I have not once been annoyed by his antics but today, I am just not having it.
"Okay, okay." Dokyeom lifts (y/n)'s dinner tray off her lap and follows Seungkwan out of the room.
"What do you wanna talk about?" (y/n) asks, clasping her hands together in her lap.
"A lot of things." I tell her, readjusting my position on the bed. "But mainly why you jumped in the state that you were in."
"Here's your knife." Seungkwan announces, laying down her towel wrapped knife in her lap, "Woozi hyung cleaned it so I hope that's okay."
"It needed a cleaning anyway. Thank you." (y/n) lays a hand over the towel before Seungkwan takes his leave. Without my instruction, Seungkwan closes the door, leaving us alone.
(y/n)'s fingers play with the edge of the towel and then she sighs. "It's the same reason as before."
I scrunch my eyebrows together, trying to remember exactly which reason.
Taking in my confusion, (y/n) finishes the explanation for me. "The Evans Family. They've continued to track us through the centuries, killing anyone they can get their hands on."
When I hear the family name, so many alarms go off in my head, I momentarily forget how to think.
"They're still going on about their little vendetta against time-jumpers?" I ask.
"They are. Their numbers have dwindled down but they still exist." (y/n) nods.
"Fuck." I curse, running a hand through my hair. "We can help you." I suddenly offer.
(y/n)'s eyes widen before narrowing, "No." She states with a cold front.
"Well, I can't let you leave like you did last time and sit around waiting for you to come back again." I try to reason. "We can help. We can stand by your side and knock this family out for good."
"I said no, Joshua." She repeats and busies herself with putting her knife away.
"But why not?" I throw my hands in the air and stand up from the bed.
"Because you of all people can't." She states without giving me a glance.
"Because I can't jump? Because I'm just a normal immortal who has no special ability to do anything?" I say, a little offended.
"That's not what I meant." (y/n) finally turns to look at me, though at this point, I don't really want to look at her but I do anyway because well, it's (y/n).
"Then what?" I place my hands on my hips.
When she doesn't answer, all my logic and sanity jumps out the window.
"You know what?" I start, "I'm going to go find these assholes now. Who do they even think they are, deciding that they hold the power to kill other immortals? Where the hell are they?" I start towards the door.
I make it one step past the bed when (y/n) turns me and slams me back into the wall, her left hand pressed into my waist and her right forearm pressed just below my neck.
"Why are you out-"
"No." She huffs out, her eyes staring daggers into mine.
I grab her left wrist and stare back. The weight of what she's been hiding finally hitting me fully.
"Tell me why." I practically beg her.
She lowers her head to rest against her right forearm, "Because they're all gone." She mumbles, voice trembling.
"Who?" I ask, trying to pull her back to look at her face.
"The others." She chokes out, her strength decreasing, "Seungcheol, Wonwoo, Hoshi, and Jun. They're, they're all gone."
My mind goes on high alert at the mention of those names. I haven't heard those names in nearly four centuries. They were part of (y/n)'s group when she met me. They were also time-jumpers. Now, they're dead.
'Does Jeonghan know?' I think to myself, suddenly worrying about him.
"The Evans family got to them." (y/n) slumps into me. Through my shirt, I can feel her face scrunch in pain from her most recent injuries.
"Shit." I whisper and lead her towards the bed, slowly.
"I saw them. I thought we would have enough time to get through the jump together." (y/n) continues talking through her sobs, each one breaking my heart. "But when I jumped, they attacked again and they, they, then the jump closed."
I wrap both arms protectively around her to pull her closer but she pushes back and looks at me with desperate eyes.
"So you, you can't help me. Otherwise you and Jeonghan and Woozi and-and, you'll all end up just like them. And I can't lose you. Not you, Joshua, not you." Fresh tears fall onto her cheeks and I hug her as tightly as I can without hurting her.
I rest my chin on the top of her head as a sigh leaves my mouth and I soak in the information. I was never that close to Seungcheol, Wonwoo, Hoshi, and Jun. They weren't really around while (y/n) was with me. But I know how much they meant to her. They were her family from the beginning. They all phased within a decade and have been tight ever since. To her, she just lost her brothers. I can't even imagine what life would be like if I lost Dokyeom, Jeonghan, Seungkwan, or Woozi.
I can understand (y/n)'s determination to keep us out of it but if we don't do something, I lose her. And this time for good. That's something I can't let happen.
"I don't want to lose you." I whisper into the quiet room. "If I don't help you, I don't know when I'll see you next. And I'm afraid that I will never see you again. I can't lose you again."
(y/n)'s cries settle slightly but she doesn't move.
"I know Jeonghan was really fond of Seungcheol. And when he finds out, cause I don't think he knows, this fight becomes personal." I continue. "It was already personal for me but now it's personal for two of us and you know we won't be able to just sit back. Especially not after we saw what they did to you." My fingers trace over some of her gauzed areas and she shivers under my touch but stays silent.
"You know, every full month, during the full moon, no matter where in the world I was, I would go to the roof or a secluded quiet area if a roof was unavailable and I would just talk to you." I tell her, staring straight ahead, "I believed that the moon would somehow give you my messages wherever and whenever you were. God, I missed you so much and I just can't, I can't imagine a life where you no longer were. I don't think I could handle that."
"I know." (y/n) mumbles, "I heard you a few times."
I look down at her but she keeps her gaze straight ahead.
"After we left, Jeonghan and Seungcheol kept in contact. I don't know how they communicated. All I know is that every time we would jump somewhere, Seungcheol always had the location of your new home if you had moved." She explains, "So sometimes, when we felt we were a safe distance ahead of the Evans family, we would travel to see you. Well, so I could at least check up on you."
My mouth is hanging agape and my words have dissipated, leaving me speechless.
"I never got too close because I was scared that I would want to stay and that you would get hurt." She continues, her voice getting a little stronger. "But the last time I was able to do that was over a hundred years ago. The Evans family has always been just behind us and I couldn't risk it. I just couldn't."
"Yet this time, you jumped right to me when they were basically on top of you." I say with new reasons why we should help, "All the more reason we need to help you. The universe is practically telling us too."
(y/n) shakes her head and pushes back to sit up on her own. "You don't know what they can do."
"I know what they did to you and that's reason enough for me." I quickly counter, my decision firm. If I am the only willing to, then fine, but I am going to help her.
"And me." Jeonghan's voice makes both us whip our heads towards the door. He leans against the doorframe with his arms crossed over his chest. I give him a nod of gratitude.
"No, no, I can't. Please." (y/n) pleads, her hand resting on my thigh for support.
"Yes you can, and yes you will." Jeonghan defends his decision. "Besides, they nearly killed my best friend. And no one gets away with that."
"I'm sorry I coul- wait, what did you say?" (y/n) catches the difference at the same time I do, "Nearly killed? Jeonghan, there's no way. I saw it with my own eyes." She drags out the sentence in confusion.
I want to say something comforting to my longest friend but nothing is coming to mind.
"Those bastards thought they had me." A male steps out from behind the doorframe and into my bedroom. Standing in front of us is Seungcheol, his face shows years of turmoil but he is alive and breathing.
(y/n) starts to stand up but stumbles so I quickly help her up. We make our way over to Seungcheol in a stunned silence. After a closer look, scars mark his arms, telling the painful journey he's been on.
(y/n) cautiously reaches out for him and he gently wraps her up and I take my leave to stand by Jeonghan.
"So you knew." I say still looking at the two.
"Yupp." Jeonghan simply states.
"And you weren't ever going to tell me?" I question.
"Well, not until we were certain she would safe." Jeonghan answers honestly with shrug. "But things changed."
"What happened?" I ask, fully facing him now.
"Two years ago? Around then, I got an email from Seungcheol saying they were going dark for a while." Jeonghan explains as (y/n) and Seungcheol move to the bed to continue their conversation. "Then maybe 8 months later, I got another email saying that they were attacked and that (y/n) jumped but he wasn't sure where or when. Though he had an inkling it might near us cause she dreamt of you for like 2 weeks straight. So he asked me to keep an eye out until he could get back on his feet. I also got the news about the other three that day. It was that night that I went out drinking and didn't come back for like two days."
"Oh shit." I remember the couple days of frantic searching before finding him in an abandoned warehouse, surrounded by tons and tons of alcohol bottles.
"Yeah. After that, Seungcheol and I decided we needed to meet up and figure out what to do next." Jeonghan continues, "He's actually been around for the past year. You just had no idea."
I search my brain for any anomalies that could've been Seungcheol sneaking around but come up empty. "How?"
"Mr. Wilson." Jeonghan smiles, "The customer who seemingly always showed up during Dokyeom's shifts but never yours or Woozi's."
My mouth drops open, now seeing the final picture.
"Joshua." (y/n) quietly calls me over. During the time I was talking with Jeonghan, she moved to lay on the bed and Seungcheol is placing the covers over her.
"Hey." I smile when I reach her, kneeling near her head. "You're going to be okay now."
She nods, "I know." Then swallows nervously.
"We need them, (y/n)." Seungcheol gently reminds her, "We can't do this on our own anymore."
(y/n) takes in a shaky breath before asking, "Will you help us?"
I grab her hand and bring it up to my lips, "Of course. I will take any chance to keep you safe, forever." A tear slips from her eye and I reach to wipe it away. "I'm done waiting, (y/n). This time I'm going to do everything to keep you here, with me."
Seungcheol moves from the bed and mutters something to Jeonghan before they both leave the room, shutting the door behind them again. I lean up and kiss (y/n)'s forehead before climbing into bed next to her.
My heart swells as I finally am able to lay next to (y/n) and spend another night with her. After 417 years of waiting, here we are. Not in the best condition but she's here in my arms and it's all I could ever ask for.
"I love you." I tell her softly as if any louder and the dream would shatter to pieces.
"I know." (y/n) turns her head and smiles at me, "And I love you, too."
70 notes · View notes
idjitlili · 4 years
Text
Carol’s cookies
Lindir x reader
Tumblr media
Request: @ifitaketwomoresteps​  said:
Hmmmm another request for a certain chestnut haired cinnamon roll named lindir? I really need some lindir fluff, not feelin too great.
I hope you are feeling better, I myself am not sleeping at all lately ,and my stomach is always upside down,it is horrible.
Summary:Being an elf that lived in the forests with your parents ,until they decided you need to get out ,by delivering some of your mothers pottery's to Rivendell, only to meet some dudes.
Word count:2058
Translations: ellen=female elf ellon=male elf nana=mother nin meleth=my love
You had been traveling to Rivendell for the past two days,with your horse and wagon,and in honesty ,you wished that your mother hadn't sent you. Do you realise how horrible it is to pee in a bush ,and you have to rush ,just in case someone steals your horse and your shit? It is terrible ,I tell you. You really disliked talking to other people especially people you did not know. Your mother had recieved a letter from Lord Elrond of Rivendell informing her that he would like some her pottery work.
You see your mother,father and Elrond used to been very close,your mother being one of the finest clay moulders he had ever seen in all his years, and your father being apart of the guard. Unfortantely your mother and father fell in love ,however there families forbid it ,so the left ,your mother already pregnant with you,she was young for an elf too, they eloped quickly.
Therefore you were brought up with barely any contact with others, your father would take you hunting for your dinner ,he had taught you how to defend yourself. Your home was small,but it was all you needed as afamily of three. Plus it was all you knew, so yeah,anyways you were indeed nervous to meet other elves.
It's not like you hadn't met anyone else apart from your parents ,they would take you one their delivery trips ,but you rarely talked to anyone. Though once when you were very young you had brought to Rivendell,to meet your grandparents. Uh yeah it didn't go well bringing your two sets of grandparents together ,however when you were just alone with your mothers parents they adored you ,but their hatred for your fathers parents were still clear.
Anyways this visit allowed you to meet an elfling like you,though with long chestnut hair,shy as were you. JUst a pair of introvets. You had been sat near a tree in the gardens ,with a bunch of cookies ;that you had baked with your father before the trip,looking at the clounds ,munching on your cookies. When a figure had approached you ,you hadn't even heard them approach you.
"oh..uh.hi.I didn't mean to disturb you,sorry" the acorn haired elf had stuttered nervously ,infront of the cute girl he had stumbled upon,you had looked up to see a cute elf turning to leave,you really did want to make friends , like your parents wanted. "oh you didn't- do you want to sit and have a cookie I m-mean you don't have to if you dont want to.."  the elf had  turned slightly around with a big grin on his young face ,nodding eagerly,before sitting down with you.
Thus began your life long friendship with Lindir.
You would write letters back to each other ,due to you living far away ,plus rarely visiting Rivendell.
By the time you were arriving at Rivendell with your mothers pottery, the last time you had seen Lindir was 400 hundred years ago ,you were now 600 years old still young ,but now was considered an adult. So when you arrived at Rivendell and Lindir had greeted you not recognising you,it was understandable you had grown into your looks ,well elf puberty hit you basically.  Lindir had grown two feet taller at least,his cheekbones much more defined ,his hair now neatly styled.
"Lindir?" you had whispered ,as he had welcomed you into Rivendell,his eyes searched your face ,brightening and widening when he had realised that it was indeed you."y/n?" he had questioned ,with that you had placed the crate of vases ,plates and cups on the ground carefully before embracing Lindir into a tight hug. In which he returns instantly ,you stayed like that for a few minutes before you both pull away. "i almost didn't recognise you,my lady,you have grown into a fine ellen." he had spoken smoothly taking in your figure,making a small blush appear on your face.
"as have you grown into a handsome ellon,but please ,just y/n, we have been friends for centuries.",youu had spoke grinning at your bestfriend, it was no lie as you grew , you had developed feelings for the shy elf. Even if you both rarely saw each other,those feelings were there for both of you ,even if the other didn't know."why have you journeyed to Rivendell" Lindir had spoken trying to act as if he hadn't blushed at you comlipment. "apparently I needed to get out more, thus here I am with the pottery that Lord Elrond had requested from my mother."Lindir had chuckled lighty ,picking up the crate of pottery,carefully in on arm,offering you the other.
In which you had taken ,looping your arm in his ,as he guided you towards where ever Lord Elrond was. "So that you are aware, Lord Elrond has guests..small ones." you didn't even get to question his words, soon you were upon them. Your eyes widen in surprise ,as they catch the sight of a bunch of dwarves, Elrond dinning with them and wizard , and one wearing no shoes and big hairy feet? Yet soon Elrond had risen from his feet ,approaching you and Lindir ,with a polite smile on his face. "Ah , Lady Y/n,It is lovely to see you again ,I assume you have brought your mothers beautiful pottery work?" you had nodded shyly with a small smile,gesturing to the crate Lindir held in his arms.
"Thank you for delivering them for me ,the items for your mother while be loaded in your wagon by the morning. Now if you will be so kind ,Lindir, will you take these to my study ,then accompany Lady Y/n to her room , and maybe give her a tour of Rivendell ,it has been a long time,since her last visit." he had spoken quickly , not wanting to keep the unpatient dwarves,that were already eyeing you up. "Yes ,it would be my pleasure ,my Lord."  Lindirs words quiet ,as your arm was still tightly clutched onto Lindir ,you didn't like the attention the dwarves were giving you at all.
"It was a pleasure to see you again ,my lady." he had bowed his head at you , in which you did the same '' as to you my Lord." and with that Lindir had lead you away from the glawking dwarves  to drop off the pottery.  Another elf had already dropping your backpack off ,with your overnight supplies  in them.
Lindir had opened the  pine door leading you into a room ,in which sat your bag at the end of the bed. "If you want to settle in have a bath and such ,I shall be back in an hour with dinner, I could have dinner with you ,o-only that is if you want,so you don't dine alone..?" blush painted on his cheeks,as did yours,looking into his bark coloured eyes . "Yes, I would love that." Lindir had smiled brightly ,turning to leave ,only for you to turn him back around hugging him tightly ,head in his chest.
"I have misssed you.." you had muffed into his shirt,he had stroked your h/c hair with his soft palm,before replying "As have I missed you...Nin Meleth" he had whispered my love ,so quietly ,like 110% more quietly than normally. Before he had pulled away ,to go get you some food ,while you bathed.
In fact you had finished much earler than expected ,so you had decided to take a walk in the gardens. Only for two dwarves,one brunette the other with hair like an lions ,to approach you almost straight away,they were handsome indeed ,but at least a head shorter than you. You was only wearing trousers and blouse type shirt nothing special.Before you could even say anything that had.
"Fili.."
"Kili"
"at your service." the blond one had joined in with his younger brother in before they both bowed to you,you just stared but quietly responding "Y/n .." you weren't sure what to say in honesty,their grins were large,you were nervous you hadn't had a personal experience with dwarves. "y/n? that is a beautiful name for a beautiful elf maiden." you had blushed ,at the brunettes words,Fili had chuckled. "as are KIli and Fili, let me guess your dads name is vili." you had sassed you really was hungry, just wanted to find Lindir and you didn't some dwarves trying to bed your or fall in love.
Their eyes had widened gasping in shock " how did you know?" the blond one had finally spoken up ,"shes obviously psychic,brother." you had giggled at them ,and King Thranduil said dwarves were terrible.  Father wasn't right about that , okay so he wasn't your actually father ,forgot to mention, your father had been slaughted horribly infront of you ,so your mother and you had seeked safety with Thranduil for a while ,until it turns out your father survived and finally found you 5o years later. Thus you moved to a different forest a safer one ,mirkwood wasn't the shit.
"awwwe brother ,isn't she a beauty?"
"Indeed ,Kili." you had flashed with a blush ,staring at your feet again "thank you." you had whispered ,still looking at the floor until a hand touched your shoulder,making jump ,tripping over your feet only to be caught,looking up to see a certain chestnut haired elf,you had blushed again,as he set you back on your feet."Why do you wait so light,,its clear I do not have the hearing nor the grace of an elf ,it is clear that you do." you spoken still in shock  from him scaring you to death. "that is not true,I just came to find you to take you for dinner." he had smiled down to you whilst the dwarves watched intensely. "I think they are  courting first she flirted with him then he has made her dinner in that balcony ,too bad  the other dwarves have already eaten it.." Kili had mentioned catching both elves attention.
"the food is gone..?" Lindir had quietly replied in disbelief ,he had made the food himself ,your favourite food aswell.. Kili had nodded harshely,Lindir's face dropped,you had placed your hand on his fore arm. "hey..Its fine ,I brought cookies , we can go eat them where we met as elflings.." you had resurred your bestfriend,who's eyes had brightened up as well as the dwarves eyes.
"Miss Y/n? Could we have a cookie?" Fili had asked with puppy dog eyes ,in which kili had joined in you had nodded pulling two cookies out of your bag passing them to them ,wishing them well on their journey. IN fact they hadn't left they had hid in a bush while you had sat with Lindir in the grass,eating cookies ,holding his hand.
"you know they are right?" you had broken the silence catching Lindirs attention,his eyes searched your face in confusion.
"about what?"
"me flirting with you.." and with that you had pressed your lips to Lindirs soft ones,pulling your hand out of his ,to place it on his ,as he kissed back.
"only been waiting 200 years to confess my love for you ,then two dwarves turn up,and i finally get guts." you had spoken again as you both pulled away for air.
"I love you too nin meleth ,your nana is going to be surprised ,when she finds out." you had giggled at his words while kili handed his brother five gold coins.
Any chance for eomer requests...
74 notes · View notes
thestuckylibrary · 5 years
Text
A Year in Reading: 2019 - Julia
2019 wasn’t kind, but fandom is always there to cheer you up. Under the cut is a list of my favorite 2019 reads <3
Please make sure to check the additional tags for each of them and happy reading!
January
The Pajama Party Incident by follow_the_sun (oneshot | 1,455 | T)
A pajama party goes horribly wrong, then wonderfully right.
heartbeat going strong by fireflyslove (oneshot | 4,364 | T)
Steve's been sent to kill the dragon holding the Princess hostage, but the Princess isn't a hostage, and the dragon isn't what he seems.
I’m a Sucker for a Wild Boy by jinlinli (complete | 9,897 | T)
Steve is a vampire who’s never met a werewolf in his life before. Bucky is a werewolf who doesn’t even know vampires exist. Naturally, neck biting means two very different things to them.
In which Steve goes for a midnight snack and accidentally gets himself werewolf married.
The Very Heart of It by merryofsoul (oneshot | 17,743 | M) - Restricted
In which Captain America adopts a dog from Bucky and they become friends — and then more.
call me old-fashioned by I_mNotYourEnemy (oneshot | 7,458 | T)
Steve rises before the sun, runs through various exercises until his muscles burn and sweat gathers on his brow. He showers and dresses and eats, and then heads out the door with dampness still clinging to his hair. His path doesn’t cross with anyone else’s until he reaches the local subway station. He jogs down the stairs to the platform and sees the man waiting there once again, the sergeant.
Or: Bucky joins Steve on his morning commute. Steve draws him and gets his number.
the long walk home by Deisderium (oneshot | 3,566 | E)
On the walk back from Azzano, Bucky keeps touching Steve's chest. Then he touches it some more. And more.
Steve bites his lip raw. AKA tiddy fic
Heckin' Chunker for Love by canistakahari (oneshot | 2,708 | T)
On the inside of the big floor to ceiling window of the office across the street, someone has used Post-it Notes to spell out a message:
W H A T I S Y O U R C A T ’ S N A M E ?
February
bucky barnes and the art class by belovedmuerto (oneshot | 1,420 | T)
Bucky takes an art class, because he wants to spend more time with Steve.
Patience by cleo4u2 (oneshot | 5,073 | E)
You should never Google yourself. Steve knows that, he's been out of the ice for over a year, but he just can't help himself. After finding a gorgeous, sexy brunette thirst tweeting about calling him Daddy, he can't help himself from responding, either.
i want it, i got it by bornes (oneshot | 1,499 | T)
Ten minutes into their impromptu mall adventure, Steve has offered to buy Bucky a designer sofa he had sat on briefly to rest his legs, a $600 headband, and a diamond-encrusted butterfly clip
Remember How to Love by betoning (oneshot | 3,852 | T)
“We shared a bed,” Bucky remembers, "and your toes were freezin’. We didn’t – nothing more, though.”
“No, Buck,” Steve swallows. “Nothing more.”
(Bucky wants more.)
tease me, squeeze me by goodmanperfectsoldier (oneshot | 3,757 | E) - Restricted
It isn’t his fault that Steve has absolutely no sense of modesty. It isn’t his fault that Steve has no desire to be in his Captain America uniform any longer than strictly necessary. It isn’t his fault that Steve tends to start disrobing as soon as they hit friendly airspace, so that he can pull on a t-shirt and sweatpants before they even make it back to headquarters, much less get home to their apartment.
The Fool in the Mirror by thepinupchemist (complete | 111,489 | E) - violence, check additional tags for warnings!
The Avengers, SHIELD, and the world at large have underestimated the pain that Steve Rogers is in.
The night after a near brush with a suicide attempt, Steve discovers the world of support omegas, and in his desperation for relief from the battlefield of his brain, demands to have one.
Enter Bucky Barnes: retired marine, millennial, amputee, brother, son, and support omega. He maybe, just maybe, can help a broken alpha heal in the twenty-first century.
The Best Way to Wake by LeeHan (oneshot | 42,285 | E)
James Buchanan Barnes lay in a glass pod in the middle of the table, frozen since he fell. Steve’s hands were on the glass before he realized he’d moved. “Wait, Captain!” “Get him out,” Steve whispered, his hands searching for a clasp, a keypad, something. “Captain, we need to keep him in stasis—“ “I said get him out!”
March
Taken by Surprise by Mireille (oneshot | 1,606 | E)
It turned out that there were things Bucky didn't know about Steve, after all. 
In the Shadow of Armistice by superheroresin (complete | 63,491 | E)
Sedryn Amathion is a young Ñoldor elf born of lower Himring near the end of the harrowed Second Age. Vice-Captain of the Forlindon Shieldmasters, herald of the High King Gil-Galad, and devotee of Eärendil, the Star of High Hope.
Or, as the ragtag Dúnedain troupe known as the Howling Commandos calls him, Steve.
The Commandos are to sabotage an orc signal tower deep within the Ephel Dúath mountains, clearing the way for the armies of the Last Alliance to march on Barad-dûr and rescue all of Middle-earth from the clutches of this new and terrible Dark Lord.
“Steve” has no way of knowing that love formed deep behind enemy lines would settle so completely inside his immortal heart, defying time, distance, and ultimately death itself.
Tinder Is the Night by rohkeutta (oneshot | 6,802 | E)
It’s the quality that gets him first. The profile photo looks like it's been taken with a semi-professional camera: it's sharp and remarkably unposed compared to most people on Tinder. The guy in the photo is the size of a fucking fridge but with Marilyn Monroe’s waistline, accentuated by the way he’s standing half-twisted towards the camera.
He’s also in the process of getting arrested.
Steve, 28, it says under the photo. New York City. Some say I have an arresting personality. This photo is from my good side. The other has a shiner.
Introduction to Fake Dating Your Best Friend 101 by crinklefries (oneshot | 24,627 | T)
Bucky stares at his best friend as though he’s absolutely lost what’s left of his dumbass mind.
“Excuse me?” he asks dumbly.
Steve sighs and sags back onto the couch, covering his face dramatically with one large, well-manicured hand.
“Dean Coulson thinks we’re dating. And gay. But like, for each other. And now I need you to fake date me so I can convince the Chancellor to fund my research.”
or;
Steve and Bucky are a pair of professors who have to fake date for academic purposes and are real dumb along the way. It's not so much a forest of pine as a whole landscape of it. It turns out fine, probably.
straight from your heart by luninosity (oneshot | 10,516 | E) - check additional tags for warnings!
Steve doesn’t mean to have the orgasm. Not exactly. Not the first time, anyway.
It’s the leather and the buckles and the capable stance. It’s the determination: familiar, and not. Steve doesn’t even know which mission this had been. Where this snapshot of the Winter Soldier had been captured, a splinter out of time. Too many to choose from. But that doesn’t matter.
His skin prickles, his heart races in supersoldier extra-double-time, with want.
Things That Go Bump in the Night by seapigeon, velleities (complete | 38,266 | E)
Many an odd critter and item have ended up on the front porch of the property Bucky house-sits in the Middle Of Nowhere, but a bleeding blond man is a first. A short inspection reveals the man to be none other than Steve Rogers; ex-Captain America, vigilante, and a wanted fugitive. Steve’s stay of a few days of recovery is prolonged, under instructions for him to lie low until the Avengers can sort out the mess that has become the Sokovia Accords. Bucky is pretty sure that he’s committing an act of treason by providing Steve a place to stay. He is also pretty sure that lengthy interaction with Steve makes one prone to impending headaches and possibly ulcers. And he is certain that he is, very assuredly, in danger of falling in love with Steve.
skin by mcwho (oneshot | 1,945  | E)
Steve is spooning Bucky, an arm draped loosely around his middle, laying on the large sofa opposite the TV. His lips are against Bucky’s hair, breathing him in.
It’d be an average Thursday night if it wasn’t for Steve being buried to the hilt inside of him and showing no signs of moving any time soon.
Rouge Fétiche by bangyababy, Neutralchaos (oneshot | 6,941 | E)
“Steve,” Bucky breathed, coming closer. “Stevie, what’s all this?”
Steve made no move to cover himself, now that Bucky had seen it, there was no point. Instead, he crossed his arms over his chest and stared at the ground. “What’s it look like?” he bit out. “I’m wearin’ women’s panties, that’s what it is.”
-
Steve has been keeping a secret from Bucky-sometimes he likes to wear women's underwear. He thinks it's wrong and he shouldn't want to do it, but he can't help it, so he keeps it to himself. But when Bucky walks in on him one day, Steve eventually has to explain himself. Of course, as it turns out, he was worried about nothing.
Army Proof by aetataureate (complete | 18,423 | T)
Despite his recent and unexpected promotion from green recruit to national icon and media darling Captain America, Steve Rogers still lacks the skills and experience necessary to thrive in the Army. First Sergeant Tony Stark has dealt with decades of tomfoolery from his subordinates, but nothing has quite prepared him for the particular brand of chaos that trails in Steve's wake.
Steve's team includes at least one competent adult in Sam Wilson, but also contains Clint Barton, a mechanic who cheats at cards and still loses, and Natasha Romanov, their terrifying police escort. Together, the gang must navigate across Eastern Europe without causing Steve’s next major international incident.
On the other side of the world, Bucky Barnes is contending with a new reality while doing what he can to keep his accidental hero boyfriend on the path that will eventually lead him home.
much tattoo about nothing by Deisderium (oneshot | 14,576 | E)
Steve Rogers gets a lot of email requests, but never one like this: James Barnes wants to use his healing factor to practice tattoos.
Turns out tattoos give Steve boners.
before we can breathe easy by belovedmuerto (oneshot | 22,052 | T)
No one touches Steve.
Bucky sets out to do something about that.
April
Count On Me Like One, Two, Three by MacksDramaticShenanigans (oneshot | 4,235 | G)
“I also need to get one of those scooter things,” Bucky adds. “That’s gotta be better than these damn crutches.” Steve’s eyes drop down to the crutches again, and he frowns. “Crutches are never comfortable,” he agrees, shaking his head. “You want a piggyback ride?” He asks, grinning as he laughs at his own joke. Bucky ducks his head and laughs along, a good-natured smile settling over his lips. “Yeah, that would be real nice, wouldn’t it?” He says, not thinking anything of it. When he looks back up, however, Steve’s already in the process of shrugging his backpack off of his shoulders. The smile melts off of Bucky’s face and his brows furrow together. Was that… a serious offer?
stay by birdjay (oneshot | 1,318 | T)
The platform buzzes, and suddenly goes quiet. The cycle has finished. Bucky doesn’t bother to look. There’s no way Steve’s coming back when he has the chance to stay. He moves to walk away, to move on with his life, somehow.
“Buck -- ?”
Bucky whirls around, hair flying.
might never be normal again (but who cares) by napricot (complete | 51,540 | E)
The beginnings of a plan took shape in Steve’s mind, as clear and simple as a tactical frontal assault. He’d prove to Bucky that this was it, he was staying: Steve was retired from the fighting game, Steve wasn’t going to let anything keep pulling them apart. Maybe then when Steve finally told him he loved him, Bucky would believe him.
All things considered, Steve thought he’d handled the whole Thanos killing half the universe thing and the ensuing bitter, desperate quest to defeat him pretty well. Sacrificing his super soldier serum to use one of the Infinity Stones wasn't a problem either, not when it meant getting back the half of the universe they'd lost, and especially not when it meant getting Bucky back. But retirement and finally confessing his feelings for Bucky? Those were proving to be more challenging.
May
Smile by WinterTheWriter (oneshot | 2,205 | E)
They say Bucky never smiles, and that's true.
Almost.
The Settler by charlesdk (complete | 52,203 | M)
“What do you want to do?”
Steve pauses and looks at them.
What he wants is to stay with them. He doesn't have any family left, they all died before he even joined the war and became... this. Captain America turned whatever he is now. But Natasha and Sam have become his family over the years. Not just because they're on the run together, fugitives and vigilantes, but way before that too.
He doesn't want to leave that.
But he knows that, realistically, he can't stay with them and they can't stay with him.
So he looks at them with a smile and lies. “I don't know.”
OR; In which Steve retires and finally finds a place to call home.
And fill our bodies up like water till we know by caughtinanocean (oneshot | 22,705 | T)
Wolves mate for life. It's both the best thing about Bucky's life, and the most inconvenient.
After six days in Steve’s arms, Bucky dreams again, for the first time since the ice — wolf dreams, four feet on the ground, the smell of the earth, and his eyes in the sky.
The moon is coming, and this reprieve — like all reprieves — is temporary.
June
Home Is Wherever I'm With You by cydonic (complete | 88,570 | E)
This is what happens when you buy a house to flip having only seen the online images: you get more than you bargained for. Bucky Barnes brings all the tools to handle a dilapidated home, but he's hardly prepared for a smart-mouthed child (with poor aim), a crying baby, and the hottest dad he's ever seen in his life living right next door.
That House-Flipper!AU.
People Change, Love Doesn't by Kateis_Cakeis (complete | 119,144 | E)
Bucky didn't fall from the train. Steve didn't die when he jumped out of the plane. They survived.
But suddenly, it wasn't enough to keep their feelings hidden. They had both almost died, only to come back stronger. Well, Steve was done pretending they were only friends, and Bucky was done too.
Surviving the war, however, brought so many challenges. Being SSR agents, eventually becoming SHIELD, building a family with their friends. Living. What would happen as the years ticked on?
miles to go before i sleep by alby_mangroves, obsessivereader (complete | 34,079 | E)
Vietnam vet Bucky is just trying to get a hot meal, and maybe a job, in the small town of Hope, but the local law enforcement has other ideas. When their brutality triggers a flashback, Bucky snaps and escapes from their custody. Hunted, exhausted, injured, he finds shelter for the night next to a cabin in the middle of the woods. He means to be long gone before the cabin's occupant awakes. Things don't turn out quite the way he expected.
All of Your Love is Sunlight by canistakahari, WarlockInTraining (oneshot | 22,657 | E)
Sometimes the path to happiness involves bad timing turned good, a butt plant, and a little everyday magic. For Steve and Bucky, it's all that and more.
if you're looking for jesus (then get on your knees) by voxofthevoid (oneshot | 18,171 | E)
S.H.I.E.L.D Agent Bucky Barnes is captured on a mission and meets Commander Steve Rogers, the erstwhile Captain America.
A Year in the Life of Sarge's Person by Angst_BuriTTo, BlueSimplicity (complete | 189,125 | E) 
This is the tale of a year in the life of Sarge’s person, AKA James Buchanan Barnes, as he tries to recover from everything that’s happened to him over the past eighty years. During that time, he is forced to deal with bad therapists, people with their own agendas, memories he doesn’t want, horrible losses from his past and almost insurmountable odds.
But this is also the story of all the crazy people Bucky meets along the way, who help him when he’s at his lowest, point him in the right direction when he feels lost, make him laugh, grow to love him for who he is, and most importantly, give him hope when he needs it most.
It’s a long and difficult journey, as Bucky works not just to let go of his past, but to also rebuild his own identity and a future for himself. And with Sarge at his side, Bucky slowly comes to realize that not everything he once loved is lost, and if he can just have enough faith in himself and those around him, he might, just might, get his very own happy ending.
Bucky IS Sarge’s person after all. As the once abandoned puppy Bucky saved one night from freezing to death, he knows, more than anyone, just how much Bucky deserves it.
Let this be light work by caughtinanocean (oneshot | 8,628 | T)
On the run with Sam and Natasha, Steve finds the words to describe his commitment to Bucky. As with most of Steve’s decisions, there are unintended consequences.
July
everything the water can be by jehans (oneshot | 5,622 | E)
“So,” Bucky continues slowly, his blush deepening, “you get the best time today. . . ,” he takes a breath, drops his voice even lower, and soughs, “I’ll let you take off my clothes. All of ‘em.”
Shit.
Steve suddenly realizes what a fucking moron he is for having initiated this line of flirtation here at the pool and right before practice.
it don't mean a thing (if it ain't got that swing) by carissima (oneshot | 6,375 | M)
“Alright,” Bucky says and stands with his hands on his hips and gives Steve a narrowed glare. “Hit me. What went wrong?”
“I uh, don’t actually know?” Steve says, and now he feels an embarrassed flush creep over his cheeks. “She stood me up.”
Bucky stares at him. Blinks once. And stares some more. “You,” he says flatly. “You got stood up?”
An Act of Kindness by greyhavensking (complete | 12,716 | T)
In which Bucky Barnes ignores personal boundaries and Steve Rogers gets increasingly flustered.
(Or five times Bucky manhandled Steve + one time it was the other way around)
crowding the hitter by rooonil_waazlib (complete | 12,917 | E)
But the trash monsters are coming closer, and Bucky’s going to be pissed if he has to get his grate replaced tomorrow.
He turns off the panini press, heads into his bedroom, and pulls his college baseball bat out of the closet, pausing only to pull on the slacks he’d just taken off. He’s going to go defend his shop, and he’s not going to do it in his underpants.
August
time on my hands (could be time spent with you) by thedoubteriswise (oneshot |  23,024 | M)
"You doing okay, kid?”
Steve releases a breath, deciding how honest he wants to be. No point in lying. No point in telling the truth, either. "Glad to see you."
"That’s not what I asked, but same to you, punk."
Quench by AidaRonan (complete | 9,417 | E)
Or the one where archeology intern Bucky Barnes meets actual archeologist Steve Rogers and reaches levels of thirst scientists once believed to be theoretically impossible.
I'll hold on a little tighter (maybe you'll stay the night) by glittercake (complete |  10,393 | E)
"No strings. I ain't got time for strings." Steve murmurs.
Bucky nods helplessly.
"Be discreet." Steve continues kissing his neck and talking, now also rubbing and squeezing his thigh. "Condoms, always. Back out anytime you want. And sweetheart—"
"Hm?" Bucky hums in a delirious daze as Steve works all the way down to his collarbone and bites, making Bucky jolt forward.
"I like it rough, don't do it any other way. If that ain't your thing, we gotta call it off right now."
this love immortal is an assassin's delight by voxofthevoid (oneshot | 12,954 | E)
After the Battle of New York, Captain America refuses to work for S.H.I.E.L.D and remains in New York. Alexander Pierce activates the Winter Soldier to handle the situation and unknowingly signs Hydra’s death warrant.
Watch With Glittering Eyes by Kellyscams (oneshot | 6,746 | E)
Witch Steve and familiar Bucky have a fun night together.
Happiness is a handful by pamurai (oneshot | 1,274 | E)
Steve's pecs compel Bucky's memories to return faster. Together they explore what makes them happy and what the future holds.
(It's Steve's tits.)
It's Been a Long, Long Time by non_tiembo_mala (oneshot | 11,862 | E)
It's been a thing almost as long as they have, since before Steve grew up and filled out his serum-given body. Connection, comfort-- whatever it is, it grounded them then and, as it turns out, it grounds them now, many decades and disasters later.
Or: the one where Steve's beautiful tits help Bucky get his memory back.
September
Do What You Did by Bentrumors (oneshot | 1,075 | E)
“Come finish what you started,” Bucky mumbles into the pillow.
“I can’t. Sam’s waiting for me.”
Bucky turns his head and glares at Steve through bleary eyes. “You’re going to leave me hanging?”
Steve shrugs.
a slow start by birdjay (oneshot | 2,689 | E)
It’s a gorgeous sight, Steve spread out like this. He wants to lick, wants to bite, wants inside where he’s hot and tight. Wants to make Steve make that gasping noise that he loves so much.
All in good time.
An Apple in the American Pie by Kimra (oneshot | 2,479 | M)
At the end of CAWS Steve runs off with Bucky, and also falls pregnant. Go figure.
October
All the sweetness and all the glory by pes (oneshot | 2,916 | M)
“Do you know,” Steve began softly, mindful of the sleeping child, “I can’t tell whom she takes after the most just yet, but one thing I know for certain. This,” he said, tracing Annie’s dimpled chin with the very tip of his finger, “this she got from your side of the family.”
(In which a visit to Bucky's new niece kindles all sorts of feelings, and a precious little secret comes to light.)
Give Up the Ghost by humapuma (complete | 44,541 | E)
Bucky Barnes is an anomaly; he's physically an Omega but has the body of an Alpha. He has a lot of the stubbornness too. Steve Rogers is an anomaly; he's a romantic and he believes in the traditions his parents raised him with. There's something about Steve that makes Bucky's Omega brain say, Mine. There's something about Bucky that makes Steve want to be more than a little reckless.
ever just as sure by ariadne_odair (complete | 7,938 | M)
“Your boyfriend is here.”
It’s take Steve a second to realise Sharon is talking to him; it then takes him even longer to respond and to stop choking on his reply. “I - er, is he?”
Sharon eyes him up like he’s lost his mind. “Well, the guy currently parking his crappy car in our car park is definitely not mine.”
Steve and Bucky are idiots. They're also in love. Obnoxiously so. Alternatively titled: Five times someone has a front-row seat to Steve and Bucky's relationship.
Where the Heart Is by Chancy_Lurking (oneshot | 12,133 | T)
“Couples are more than welcome to room together.”
Steve freezes up, feels his eyes go a little wide before he can help himself. He stumbles over his words, “Oh, I—No, we’re not—”
“We’re not going to give you any trouble about that,” Fury presses, turning to squint at them head on. “Stark likes to say we’re opened minded and close-knit. Your private life is your business, but you don’t need to hide here, understand?”
Steve goes to reiterate that they’re not a couple, but startles when Bucky’s hand settles on the small of his back. He looks at him like he’s lost his mind, but Bucky’s just smiling at him. “Never can be too careful these days,” he says.
(Steve and Bucky pretend to be a couple when they move in, but at some point, it stops feeling like pretend.)
Like gifts under trees by pes (oneshot | 6,528 | T)
Inside the leather satchel, bundled in a few layers of cloth, was the smooth swell of an egg. A dragon egg, dark, and shiny, and fluttering with life in its makeshift nest.
“I think it’s about to hatch,” Steve breathed, clutching the bag to his chest helplessly.
Bucky didn’t need to think twice.
Your voice is all I hear somehow, calling out winter by chaosmanor (oneshot | 13,597 | E) - stucky/symbiote
Bucky is remarkably functional, considering what he's been through. Then, sometimes, it's like a sullen killer is wearing his skin.
(Or, the fic no one asked for, where Bucky has a symbiote named Winter and everyone has to work out how to live together.)
Misery I Need by mwestbelle (oneshot | 2,592 | M)
"You've seen his file, right?" She let out a low whistle. "What a shame. To do that to such a pretty omega."
They thought he was asleep. She didn't mean anything by it, and if she knew that he'd heard he's sure she would have apologized. But it's her voice that he hears whenever he feels out of place, uncomfortable in his skin. What a shame.
OR a different take on Steve Rogers' body issues
November
Simple by Ellessey (oneshot | 4,043 | T)
Steve's holding Bucky's drink out to him and he's looking at Bucky in that way he does. It makes Bucky want to cover his face. It makes him want to peek inside of himself and see if he can actually spot the butterflies.
"Here you go," Steve says. "Extra hot, so be careful, 'kay?"
"Okay, thanks..." Bucky says. And then he has to swallow again, and his throat feels awfully tight but he practiced this last night and he can do this. He can. He opens his mouth again and adds, "Steve."
--
Every morning Bucky walks to a nearby coffee shop as a kind of exposure therapy. He isn't going there for the coffee, and he's not actually sure he's going there for the therapy anymore, but he's definitely going there for Steve Rogers' smile.
Every Move the Feeling Follows by thepinupchemist (oneshot | 5,412 | E)
After the Avengers win the battle against Thanos, everyone gets to go home. Steve and Bucky retire, get mated, and get surprised. They have a baby, and they get to start their lives again.
not idiots at all by icoulddothisallday (oneshot | 2,297 | M)
Somehow, despite the seventy years in the ice and his overwhelming fame and popularity, Steve’s words have never been recorded anywhere. He suspects that he has Peggy to thank for that. The words have always been a source of embarrassment for Steve, for one reason or another. When he was a child, his words were just another thing that set him apart from others. Other kids had common words - mostly names, as that was what you were supposed to say to a stranger. Some kids got dealt generic words like excuse me and good morning. Steve’s words didn’t make much sense, the ones that did were...not intended for polite conversation.
Thursday Nights with Bucky Barnes by Ellessey (oneshot | 4,662 | T)
Steve has a comfortable, well-worn routine for his Thursday nights, until the old man who runs the laundromat breaks his hip.
Then Steve has Bucky instead.
Rare Is This Love (Keep It Covered) by histoires_eternelles, musette22 (complete | 66,773 | E)
It's 2014. Captain America has been out of the ice for three years and is trudging along, saving the world and trying to get used to living in the future. Steve thinks he knows how the rest of his life is going to pan out – a life of duty, which he chose when he signed up to be Erskine’s science experiment. But then, he meets Bucky Barnes: the out-of-this-world-gorgeous mechanic and war vet, who turns Steve’s life upside down and makes him question everything he thought he knew. Slowly, Steve comes to realize there is more to life than duty and punching Nazis. Just one problem though: how on earth does a 96-year-old virgin who only just realized he may not be entirely straight make the transition from crush to relationship? Cue healthy amounts of self-doubt, awkward flirting, pretty blushing, existential crises, emotional growth, and maybe, possibly, a sexual awakening.
rather be a lover than a fighter (found peace in your violence) by voxofthevoid (oneshot | 4,355 | E)
The dust has settled, and the world is healing. Men are too. 
The Soldier's Revenge by LeeHan (complete | 76,406 | E)
Bucky Barnes turns himself in to SHIELD two years after dragging Captain America out of the Potomac River. He was deprogrammed in Wakanda and has been hunting down Hydra ever since, but he needs help if he wants to take proper revenge on his captors. He turns to his old enemies: SHIELD and the Avengers, but it'll take more than a few words to win their trust after the Winter Soldier brought SHIELD to its knees not long before. Now at SHIELD's mercy, the only thing that stands between Bucky and his revenge is the approval of Captain Rogers: a self-righteous asshole that Bucky barely knows.
All Those Little Pieces by Ellessey (complete | 40,516 | M)
Steve has never forgotten Bucky Barnes. Not their childhood together, not the horror of the moment Bucky fell too far for him to reach, and not the way he's loved him all the while.
Bucky has forgotten everything about Steve, at least at first. But there's still a feeling there, warm in his chest—and maybe now that he's found his way back to Steve Rogers and his sunny apartment, there's a chance it might turn into something more.
December
No fics for this month, since it was a difficult one.
In any case, I hope you enjoy all of these recs above and have a great 2020! <3
108 notes · View notes
Text
Awake
> Pairing: Kim Seokjin x Miya Lee (OC)
> Genre: Hunter!au, Romance, Fluff, Smut, Angst
> Warnings:
> Word Count: 3573 
> Summary: Miya Lee had such a normal life. Taking over the cafe her family owns and runs, going out with friends, gossiping with her coworkers about the cute guy that sits in the window of her cafe, and practising magic that her mother and grandmother and great grandmother passed on before them.
Kim Seokjin was an anomaly. He was born, December 4th 1392, making him, to date, 627 years old. His family was murdered, his fiance murdered, their blood running over the ruins of his past. For 600 years he looked, searched and hunted for the witch that got away. He was trained for this.
Jin hesitated. Her face was the same... she was back to haunt him. Back to love him.
Miya was in trouble... she was at risk of truly falling in love.
> A/N: Hey guys, this is another fic for BTS!! This is for Kim Seokjin!! I have had this idea for a few months now and this is my first time in creating an original character for a fic like this!! So I would really appreciate your feedback on the OC and this story!! ALSO those who wish to be added to an eventual tag list, please leave a comment or an ask or message me!! Thank you so much for your support!!
This is the story of how he died. The only man she had ever loved.
A man who's name bought fear to the shadows. A man cursed with life.
This is the story of how he died. Her love. Her heart. Her Jin.
They found him on the streets, scared, alone, half dead and  orphaned. They took him in and gave him a roof over his head, and they trained him. They trained him to be an assassin, to hunt and to kill. They honed his magic and skills until he was their ultimate weapon.
They did not ever think he would turn those skills on them... one by one... when he discovered the truth, when he found out who they really were.
"So full of fire, isn't he?" An aging man, closer to death then he would ever willingly admit, admired the young, strong man's skills. A glint in his eyes didn't go unnoticed, a wicked flared brightened his eyes, something untold in them. "It's going to be glorious to watch it burn him up."
600 years would soon blur altogether, making no sense, even with the seasons changed. As the green bleeds into red, orange and yellow, ultimately becoming old and withered, covered in the cold, Kim Seokjin would always return home. At least, if the council allows it.
What felt like the blink of an eye for him, was 12 years for a mere mortal, and he was finally home. As time changed, he was the only constant, forever remaining as he was, the man who never aged, the man who never died... the man who's heart was to beat once again.
Turning his jacket up against the harsh winds, Jin walked the familiar streets, his hands tucked safely from the cold in his pockets. The old streets almost gave him comfort, he had watch them being built, even helped with some of them if he wasn't called away on a job. They we're as much apart of him as anything he had built.
He would never be lost, not here. Not ever.
Jin easily picked up the trail, the trail that only magic could leave behind. The specks of impurity leading him as the sun still peaked over the buildings. He knew what to follow, he knew the signs, he was trained for this.
Seeing where it had lead him, Jin pulled his collar down, exposing his face. His eyes scanned, never missing anything as he moved towards the small cafe in front of him, where the trail ended... or maybe began. Bypassing the entrance of the small cafe, glancing into the windows, flashing a smile to the workers who watched him.
Before long, Jin was at the backdoor, well the entrance. 2 rather large bodyguards guarded the door almost bored. One stood, arms folded across his chest, tattoos covering his arm and what Jin could see of his neck. The smell radiating off of him told Jin he was young, if not for his eyes. A young wolf, no doubt his first day, Jin wouldn't have put it past it being his first job ever.
The other was a lot more relaxed, even opting to lean against the graffited wall. His eyes were sharp, half closed, but sharp. Anyone on the end of his glare would most likely burst spontaneously. His hair was the most eye catching to Jin, a vibrant green, not unlike anything he had seen in his many years. It didn't seem to go with the entire black he wore, or the dangerous glint to his eyes. A vampire... the only vampire who wasn't afraid to tell Jin to "Fuck off."
"Did you get lost or soemthing old man?" An unintered deep voice scoffed.
"Or something." Jin smirked, lazily shrugging his shoulders.
"You here to cause trouble then?" He asked, finally looking up from his feet, eyes meeting Jin's.
"Min Yoongi... when have I ever caused trouble?" Jin rocked slightly on his feet, hands in his jean pockets.
The unamused vampire, Yoongi, cracked a smile; "You really want me to answer that?"
"I guess not." Jin laughed, the sound echoing off the enclosed streets. "Who's the kid?"
"Jungkook." Yoongi's eyes pointed to the wolf, who stood silently and confused. "Jeon family."
"Ahh..." Jin nodded looking at Jungkook. "I knew your grandfather kid." Jin offered his hand, which Jungkook hesitantly took. "He still owes me a pig."
Jungkook's eyes widen in realisation. The dawning of who exactly this man was finally hitting him. He was Kim Seokjin, Famous Immortal Witch Hunter.
"Hyungnim." Jungkook bowed.
"Oh god please, none of that." Jin put his hands in front of him, stopping the young wolf.
"He's just one of us, kid." Yoongi pushed lightly on Jungkook's arm, causing him to stand again, his eyes lowered.
"I would like to get in though. If that's not too much trouble." Jin pointed to the rather large door, invible to those who didn't know it was there.
"Are you going to cause any trouble?" Yoongi finally stood to his full height, even if he was shorter then both Jin and Jungkook, he was still intimidating. "I just need to know if we should leave now?"
"Nah I'm here for business." Jin smiled easily. "Only to ask a few questions."
"I'm going to regret this." Yoongi moved Jungkook out of the way of the door, opening it and allowing Jin access.
"Have a little faith, Yoongi." Jin moved into the door.
"I do have faith..." Yoongi called after Jin as he moved into the dark room. "I have faith you'll cause trouble."
Yoongi could hear the dying ends of Jin's laugh as he moved further into the dark space. He hadn't seen his Jin-hyung in 12 years, there could only be one reason he was back. Min Yoongi hoped to every god that it wasn't the reason, but he never had that kind of luck before.
The almost pitch black corridor Jin walked soon lit up, small witch lights surrounded him, guiding him. The music soon followed, obvious protection spells placed around the building to keep the music in, and it was getting louder now.
The music followed the chatter, and as Jin finally made it to the open floor, pushing the beads covering the entrance, he could see tonight was a busy night. All manners and natures of people... creatures moved around the place. All looking for a good night. All looking to be someone else for the night.
Opening his jacket, Jin relaxed into the mix of people, moving towards the bar. Women, more specifically, the Fae threw smiles, soft caresses of their hands, legs, bodies onto Jin as he walked passed. Jin flashing his own smile as he made his way through the mass of bodies.
He was here on business... he could play when his job was over. It was the only thought that got him to the bar, slipping his body into a small open space. One look behind him and he could see a few people had recongised him, causing Jin to duck his head, trying to not draw attention to himself.
"Hyungnim..." Jin heard a familiar voice in front of him, looking up from under his lashes, an even more familiar smile caught his attention. "It's good to see you again Hyungnim."
"It's good to see you too, Taehyungie." Jin smiled, lifting his head slightly to make eye contact. "You're working the bar now?"
If anyone didn't know, they would have thought Jin looked almost concerned. In fact... Jin was concerned. Anyone willing to put Kim Taehyung behind a bar had a strong stomach... and maybe an unbreakable bank account.
"Yep." Taehyung nodded enthusiastically, pride shining in his eyes. "They put me behind the bar since Jungkookie got here. Said he looked more intimidating or something."
"The kid?" Jin pointed his thumb over his shoulder, back towards where he had just walked in.
"Yeah the kid." Taehyung smiled fondly. "And he does. Look more intimidating then me."
"But you're a lot more dangerous aren't you?" Jin smiled, almost proud at his friend.
"It's part of my charm." Taehyung's eyes wander over Jin's shoulder, sending a wink to, undoubably, a blushing woman.
"You get more tips here don't you? That's why you like it." Jin laughed, shaking his head at Taehyung as he focused back on him.
"Of course I do!" Taehyung smiled wider. "But I seem to be competing with the happiest pup alive," Taehyung pointed to another wolf behind the bar, who's smile radiated sunshine, hearing Taehyung mentioned him and throwing a smile towards them both. "And a man who's lucky to have magic on his side." Taehyung pointed to the other end of the bar where a tall witch stood, his dimpled smile looked a little embarrassed as a vampire woman slide her number across the bar towards him.
"You're pretty lucky then aren't you?" Jin chuckled as he looked back towards the simpled witch who almost tripped over his own foot, catching himself quickly. "Being a fae prince and all."
"Well... the royal part gets me bigger tips." Taehyung laughed. "I need to survive as much as anyone else."
Jin couldn't help but laugh, shaking his head as Taehyung handed him a drink. Already knowing what he needed, perks of Taehyung's bloodline.
"I'll see you around Hyungnim. I've got to get back to work." Taehyung gave an extravant bow before moving to the next one.
Jin shook his head sipping his cold drink, a vibrant purple drink that seemed to smoke. Something new... or old. Either way it wouldn't have an effect on him, nothing ever would again.
"He enhanced it." A deeper voice moved in front of him.
"What?" Jin looked back towards the bar, one of his oldest friends eyed his drink.
"You're drink. He enhanced it." Namjoon gestured his head towards Taehyung who flirted with a group of pixies.
"He's still trying to see if he can get me drunk?" Jin asked, noticing the strong smell radiating off the drink now.
"Aren't we all?" Namjoon smiled wide. "So you're back?"
"Mmh." Jin hummed, taking another sip.
"For?" He pressed.
"I tracked them back here. I have a few questions for some people." Jin shrugged, noticing Namjoon's eyes widening.
"You need any help?" He asked, leaning over the bar towards Jin as their voices became hushed, downed out by the noise around them. "I have a few sniffer dogs if you need them?"
Jin laughed as Namjoon gestured to Hoseok who made his way towards them both. No doubt he would be the best to sniff a scent out if he needed. But there was no point, Jin had already found them.
"Nah, I don't need your sniffer dog this time." Jin spoke a little loud for Hoseok to hear.
"And here I was, about to offer my services." Hoseok pouted, jutting his bottom lip out. "Why don't you need my help this time?"
"I already found her." Jin finished off his drink.
"Her?" Namjoon asked surprised. "It's a her this time?"
"Yeah... I found the bloodline, everyone is dead, except her." Jin looked at his friends, seeing their minds already working. "No one had found her because she changed her name. But I recognised the magic...."
Namjoon and Hoseok shared a look, noticing Jin hesitate. That was the thing that worried them, almost scared them. Kim Seokjin never hesitates.
"What else?"
Hoseok finally asked as the music around them stopped, the lights going out except one single spotlight on a loan spot on the stage behind them. Jin turned around on his chair, Namjoon and Hosoek still listened, even as the crowds of people moved to get a good seat, to be able to see the stage, to witness the show.
"Only I would recognise the name."
Both Namjoon and Hoseok knew that was the end of the conversation, even if they wanted to press the issue. But they both know, if he needed help, if he needed their help, he would always ask. And they would never turn him down.
An excited hush had fallen over the room, wide eyes stare at the only light in the room, like months to a flame. The only thing that could be heard is the heart beat. The heartbeat played through the room, boom boom, boom boom, boom boom.
Then it started, over the heartbeat, rain started to fall, a crack of lightening, a snap of thunder. The room lit up with the flashes of light, as the rain fell, never quiet masking the beartbeat.
Out of the darkness came a shadowy figure, the rain quickly soaking them. The once oversized shirt that covered their small frame now stuck to their skin, hair stuck to their face, a strip of material covered their eyes. They walked, more stumbled out of the darkness and landed in the middle of the light.
She was in control. The stage was hers. And yet you would have thought she was in a panic as she struggled, reaching out, looking for something, something to hold onto. Her hands shooks, her lips trembled, the rain didn't stop.
A particularly harsh snap of thunder caught the audience by surprise, casing even Jin to jump a little as the music finally began. As the first few seconds of the beat started, the girl hit the stage, causing droplets of water to fly around her.
Then a very confident presence walked out behind her, even without seeing his face, anyone in the room could feel the smirk as he stalked his prey. Everyone could see he was not about to lose. Not now. Not ever.
"Do you understand what's going on?" Hoseok whispered to Jin from behind him.
"Huh? Jin's eyes wavered for a fraction of a second from the girl who was now wrapped in the arms of the man.
The two bodies rolled once, twice around the stage before she was op top of him. Jin could see the power struggle, in this moment it seemed like she was in control. But from the mans arms supporting her, maybe he was wrong.
"He's caught her. Even without her realising. Hence the blindfold." Hosoek's never left the stage, a small smile gracing his lips.
"Caught her?" Jin asked, watching the pair seperate, the girl falling back onto the stage alone, wet and confused, still trying to reach out for something, anything, to hold onto.
"Watch as he stalks her." Hoseok offered to Jin, who's eyes moved to the man who walked behind her, watching her. "He's the spider. And he just caught his prey."
The man slid on his knee, causing water to hit the girl, who tried to move back, but the man caught her wrist. Pulling her easily flush against him, his hands slowly moving the blindfold off her a little to see her eyes. Helping the girl to stand, the man stood behind her, first lovingly and thenhis hands push the blindfold back over her eyes, pushing her to the ground and walking away from her.
This time the girl reached up and towards the roof, where something had been lowered. Her trembling hands as she gripped it, tangling her hands in it before it lifted her off the ground. The audience's took a collective breath as she now hung in the air by her right hand, the man below her.
"She's in his web now. He caught her." Hoseok continued as they watched the girl finally move into the silks. "His movements are the same as hers..." Both the man and woman moved, one suspended in the air, the other on the ground, on the water. "He's waiting for her to tire before he strikes. Making sure she doesn't fight back. Almost making her trust him."
Jin watched as the woman climbed the silks, rolling and weaving her body in and out, always blindfolded. Then she pushed her blindfold off, as she spun upside down, her piercing eyes could finally be seen. They roamed the area, Jin felt like his heart speed up, his breathing stopped, his palm instantly getting sweaty.
"She can see now. Where she is and what she's doing." Hoseok and Jin watched as she climbed to the top of the silks. "She's accepting her fate. The spider is waiting..." They looked back to the man who waited now, open arms for his prey. "All that's left to do is fall."
At that moment, Jin watched as the women unravelled herself from the silks, going faster and faster, nearer to her ultimate death. At the ends of the silks the woman's hand reached the man.
And that was it. The end. She chose her fate, she allowed the spider to have her. The man triumph, holding his trophy with pride.
"She's now his." Hoseok finished as the stage went dark, the rain came to a slow stop and one last rumble of thunder, lightening filling the room before the two disappeared from the stage. "So... what did you think Hyung?"
"I can't say I'm much of a dancer myself..." Jin smiled as he turned back to face Hoseok. "But it was captivating."
"Their my favourite dancers to ever set foot in 'Moon'. Some of the best chemistry I've seen around here since I started working here." Hoseok proudly looked to the stage.
"You did that?" Jin motioned his head over his shoulder.
"Mmh." Hoseok hummed, his smile never faltering. "Noona needed a new choerogher, I volunteered."
"Noona?" Jin raised his eyebrows surprised. "What happened to Mister Lee?"
"No one told you?" Hoseok looked confused, his eyes getting sad when he realized Jin didn't know. "Mister Lee died 3 years ago. His granddaughter took over."
Jin was used to death, being a creature who constantly misses death, he saw a lot of it. Although he may be hundrends of years older, Jin had such respect for a man like Mister Lee, who lived his life to help every, including Kim Seokjin.
"I'm sorry to hear that." Jin bowed his head a little. "Mister Lee was a great man. I remember watching him grow up."
"It was a huge blow to the witch community." Hoseok remembered what his friends were like, espeically Noona when her grandfather died. "If it wasn't for his granddaughter, this place would never have kept open."
"I don't think I ever meet this granddaughter of Mister Lee. Is she here tonight?" Jin asked.
"As a matter of fact-"
Hoseok cut himself off. The air around them too tense, too quiet after such a performance. Looking up, Hoseok saw why, everyone in the room had gone silent, staring at the entrance.
A group, of at least 6, all stood, in customary hunter gear and weaponary. No one moved, even less they tried not to breathe, to not drawn attention to themselves. To not cause trouble.
"Jin-Hyung..." Hoseok whispered. "I think it's time for you to leave."
Jin looked over his shoulder, easily recognising the 6. They were known to the hunters as his "Handlers", making sure he's in the right place at the right time. They were probably here to collect him, Jin having give them the slip eariler to make his way to 'Moon'.
"So you found me?" Jin asked loudly, to no one in particular. "Sir..." An aged voice spoke up.
"I was kinda enjoying this game of cat and mouse." Jin laughed loudly, looking up to where Hoseok, Namjoon and Taehyung had all gathered in front of him, scared.
"It's time to go, Sir." The aged man tried again, moving towards the bar.
"I'm just a man enjoying a drink." Jin gestured to the bar. "I'd ask you to join me, but..." Jin laughed again. "Well I don't like you."
Jin's laugh was the only thing heard in the room besides the almost deafening click of heels. Even Jin could hear them, espcially with his advanced hearing, but he hadn't turned around yet.
"Sir I think it's really time to go." The voice was almost panicked, causing Jin to spin around, the man too close now.
"I really don't think it's in your best interest to be threatening me right now, kid." Jin never raised his voice, nor moved from his seat, and yet he was the most threatening in this situation. "Sir..."
But it was too late. Like an angel in the the depths of hell, she moved out of the shadows and into the light. Jin's world stopped.
Quickly, he stood from his seat, knocking it over. He couldn't believe his eyes. There she was. Back from the dead.
"Jia?" Jin whispered, and yet it carried to the other end of the room.
"Sir..."
But Jin wasn't listening anymore. Here she was. His Jia. Back from the dead. Standing there, looking back at him with the same eyes.
Jin made to step away from the other hunters, towards her, but they wouldn't let him. Quickly reaching out, the closest hunter caught Jin's wrist. Without missing a beat, Jin shook him off, but they kept coming and coming.
Soon enough Jin was fighting for his way to her, but one minute she was there, and like so many years before, she was gone.
18 notes · View notes
teamicamea-scl · 5 years
Text
A Tour : The Trio
Hello, guys, we are excited to share this with you!! We love October and all the spooky things related. This month we’ll be sharing the Trio’s spooky adventures.
This one was so much fun to write, Pol and I ( @rossyele ) share a fascination for abandoned places so we came up with this idea from a prompt list going around. (Feel free to send us a request and a character, we’ll love to write something for you)
We aren’t going to say the place the trio is visiting but we’re sure you’re going to figure it out!!
Please enjoy the trio having a fun time :)
════════════════════
The sound of his boots echo around the abandoned hallways as Castor takes a look around. Even with the sunlight streaming in from the windows with shattered glass, the place still looks hella creepy.
“You sure know how to pick a tour, Ly,” he comments, nudging a fallen piece of wood with his boot.
“I knew you’d like this peaceful place.” She steps over the broken glass, liking the sound it makes under her shoes.
“Peaceful...Heh, sure, it’s peaceful alright. ‘Coz everyone here is dead.” Castor rubs the back of his neck but one glance at the guy beside him who looks identical to Castor (except their hair) makes him smirk. Pollux’s eyes are wide and though he’s not talking, Castor notices his twin taking in everything he can --from the holes in the walls to the debris on the ground to the open doors leading to abandoned classrooms.
“Shit really went down here, huh?” Lyra asks picking on the chipped paint on a doorframe.
“A nuclear accident.” Pollux steps into one of the classrooms, adjusting his glasses. “Countless casualties, mourned by the entire world.” He trails a hand on one of the desks, eyes taking in the scattered pieces of paper on the desks and on the floor. Pencils and erasers once belonging to children.
Tumblr media
“I knew you’d like it when I heard such a place like this existed.”
“Pollie likes the weirdest things.” Castor steps in front of the chipped blackboard and then clears his throat. “Lyra, where is your homework? Are you going to tell me it flew out the window again?” He puts his chin high up in the air and looks at Lyra, his imitation of one of their teachers making Pollux shake his head.
Lyra hurries and sits on one of the broken chairs, she clears her throat. “Professor, how did you know?”
“Because I have nothing else better to do than to torment you, Lyra.” Castor walks around slowly, as though he’s skating, hands clasped together by his waist. “I’m an adult, I know better than all of you so listen to me and submit your papers noooOOooooOOoooOOooow!”
“Professor!” She raises her hand. “Pol, is not seated.”
Castor whips his head to Pollux, his chin still pointed up. “PoLLUX!” he screeches in a girly voice. “Sit down, you beautiful bastard!”
Pollux arches an eyebrow and waves his hand over a seat. An illusion of himself appears seated on one of the chairs and the real Pollux moves to leave the room.
“Pollux!” Castor screams in the same girly voice. “Don’t turn your back on me young man! I’ll have you know I used to run marathons back in my day...about 600 years ago when I was a wee young lass!”
Lyra laughs throwing her head to the back, holding the sides of her stomach. “Pol, such a troublemaker.”
“I’m not interested in sitting on a dusty chair.” Pollux replies before going back to the hallway.
“Dusty?! Who said anything about dusty chairs! I’ll have you know this school hasn’t seen a dusty chair in a millennia! Because we always glue the butts of our students to the seats, that’s why!” Castor walks in that ridiculous manner, keeping up the act as he runs after his brother. “Pollux! Come back here and give me your butt!”
Almost falling from the chair Lyra laughs following the twins out of the room. “Professor, I can give you…”
Castor stops in his tracks and turns to Lyra, not breaking character. “Why Lyra...come here and lemme smack that booty.”
Pollux, seeing Castor not paying attention to him anymore, strides towards his brother and hits him across the back of his head. “Stop being an embarrassment.”
“Hey, you two, play nice!” Lyra tells them, her eyes catch something and she walks towards the window. “Fuck! Look at that!” She points outside, an old rusty ferris wheel stands not far from where they are.
The twins turn to where she’s pointing, Castor rubbing the place where Pol hit but a smile spreading across his face. “A fucking ferris wheel! Fuck yeah, there’s an amusement park here?! Let’s fucking go!”
Pollux shrugs and starts walking back towards the exit but on their way back, he sees a gas mask on the ground.
“Whatcha got there, baby bro?” Castor slings an arm around Pollux’s shoulders from behind but when he sees what Pollux is looking at, he gasps excitedly. “Oh fuck yeah! I can look like that guy from the movies! Those movies with the Jedis! Luke and Leah!” He starts to imitate Darth Vader’s breathing. "Heard the second movie's coming out this week. We should see it…"
While the twins are entertained Lyra picks a toy from the ground, a dusty teddy bear. The bear probably belonged to a kid and it reminds her of her own toy. She finds a place for it near a window. “Maybe they’ll come back for you, so sit tight.”
Tumblr media
She doesn’t notice the twins have grown quiet, looking at her. Castor walks over to her and when Lyra turns around, his lips are waiting for hers. He presses a quick kiss to those soft red lips and he smiles at her. “You’re being real cute, sunshine.”
“Am not… I just thought it’d be lonely to stay here, too bad we can’t take it with us.” She glances one last time at the bear before leading Castor towards the exit.
While the two of them are speaking, Pollux wanders into another room, surveying the damage the accident caused on this school. The room doesn’t have much furniture in it, so he’s not sure what it was before everything was destroyed. But he sees a frame of a television set on the ground, and a doll lying on the ground near it. There’s another one of those gas masks at the other side of the room as well and Pollux finds himself wanting to leave something for future visitors.
Tumblr media
“Leaving without you, Pol.” Lyra screams from the outside. Pollux admires his handiwork but moves to the exit as well, meeting up with Lyra and Castor. The three of them follow the path leading to the amusement park, each one taking in the abandoned city. It’s as though people left in a hurry, cars parked everywhere on the street, debris and trash scattered around.
The trio nears the amusement park. It’s a strange mix between the metallic structures and the greenery that has found its way back to the surface, claiming the territory. Lyra tightens her hold on Castor’s hand, the scene giving her the creeps. She’s not scared of death but the air is filled with a sense of abandonment and loss, as if the things left behind feel neglected and betrayed.
Castor squeezes back and allows more warmth to flow into hands without hurting her. He walks closer to Lyra and he knows she must be feeling the same way he is --kinda creeped out. But he knows the three of them can handle anything that comes their way, be it the lone wolves they spotted on the edge of town where the streets were covered by grass or maybe the ghosts of the people who used to live there.
On the other hand, Pollux doesn’t stop looking around him, imprinting the scenes to his memory. Everything about this place is fascinating. It’s...upsetting that there was an accident here, but the remnants of the city are beautiful, in a haunting but evoking way.
“So, I guess this is the main attraction.” Lyra tells them, watching the ferris wheel. Everything else on the park’s ground is old and broken, some of the rides having only a few pieces left.
Castor runs to what used to be bumper cars. Now, there's a thick green moss on the cars and ivy vines crawling around the walls and the ceiling. He stares at it and he can almost hear the laughter of children as the cars bump into each other or circling around the enclosed space and chasing other cars.
Lyra slowly swings her hand, her eyes focused on three of the bumper cars. Lifting her other hand, Lyra sees the invisible strings connecting her fingers to them. Lyra tests the waters and moves her fingers, watching as the cars slide a few inches. Castor jumps back, surprised, when he sees them moving. Pollux stands behind Lyra and a small smile appears on his face as he waits to see what she’ll do next. She starts making circles with her palms facing the ground and the ride comes to life, the circles grow bigger and she overlaps her hands making the bumpers clash against the other. There’s a satisfied smile on her face.
“Holy fuck, babe! Look at that! You got ‘em to work!” Castor exclaims, laughing excitedly. “You are the best! The fucking BEST, Lyra!” He starts running around, gesturing for them to follow. “Come on! Let’s see what else we can mess with!”
Pollux sighs as he falls into step beside Lyra. “I don’t think Castor will ever grow up.”
Lyra lets her arms fall on the side of her body and the cars come to a halt. “Have we, Pol? Because this feels just like when we used to run away to the woods… just, please, no weird gifts this time.”
“I’ll have you know, we collected all those insects carefully. We didn’t want you to have two of the same species.” Pollux remarks, following after his...supposedly older brother. “But no, I don’t think we’ve had a chance to properly grow up yet.”
“So thoughtful, Pol.” She smiles but the expression fades away rather quickly. “We had to flee those years, that time of our lives, in order to survive. We abandoned that phase like people abandoned this place.”
“True.” Pollux is quiet for a moment, when something to his right catches his eye. “But it doesn’t mean we’re without hope, Lyra. It doesn’t mean the future is as bleak as it seems.” He points to a blooming red rose among the shrubbery. “I still have hope for the future. Our future.”
“Our future…? Hahaha. You really think we have one..?” She stops herself and shakes her head. “Future or not, we have now, right?” She glances at Castor who is still running around. Pollux follows her gaze.
“Ah...yes. We have now.” He watches his brother step on top of a swing and start swaying back and forth.
“Hey! You slowpokes! Hurry up! I don’t wanna be here when it gets dark!” Castor calls out to them.
Lyra looks at Pollux one last time before running to Castor. “Are you afraid of the dark?” She asks the blue-haired twin.
“Tch. Me? Scared of the dark? Babe,” he says, smirking. “I can shoot fire from my hands. I think the dark should be scared of me!” He throws his head back and laughs as he continues moving on the swing. Pollux, however, finds himself standing in front of the huge ferris wheel that they saw from the window. It still looks fairly intact compared to the rest of the city. But with no electricity, there’s no chance of it working. Too bad. He’s sure the view of the city would be really great from the top.
Tumblr media
“Bet he wants to ride that.” Lyra tells Castor pointing at the younger twin. “But it’s too heavy for me, I can’t move it.” She tries from where she stands but all she can manage is to make one of the baskets swing. Castor hops off the swing and puts an arm around her shoulders, looking at the moving basket.
“You don’t have to, sunshine. Can you imagine that guy sitting on the seat? He was already complaining about the dirt inside the school.” Castor looks around and checks his watch. “We’ve been here for hours now...we should start heading back.”
Lyra looks up at the sky, the evening hues are starting to paint the abandoned city. “Yeah, who knows what comes out to play at night.”
Castor’s fingers slide down her arm in a soft caress before he puts his arm around her waist, slipping his thumb under her shirt and brushing against the side of her stomach. “Yeah...who knows?” he says in a low husky voice, a playful smirk on his face as he looks at Lyra.
There’s a sudden warmth on her cheeks as she looks at Castor and feels his finger touching her skin. “I…”
But the moment is broken when the two hear a metallic groan, then loud creaking. There’s a confused look on Castor’s face as he stares back at Lyra when they hear the younger twin call out, “Lyra, this is amazing! I didn’t know you could do this!”
“Pol…” Lyra watches the old ferris wheel making an effort to move, the solitude of the place allows the sounds to echo majestically. “Pol, come here, now!”
“Babe, that’s not you, is it?” Castor can feel the goosebumps spreading across his arms. Even without Lyra’s answer, he knows she can’t be moving that old monster of a ride; she just said so herself. “Fuck. POLLUX! COME HERE!”
Pollux takes a step closer to the ride, watching the ferris wheel start to move more naturally now, as though it’s managed to stretch and remove the cricks in its joints.
“Lyra’s gotten more powerful,” he murmurs under his breath. He’s certain the insides of the baskets would be filthy, but still...the view from the top must be worth it. Castor and Lyra watch in horror as Pollux starts walking toward the entrance of the ride.
“Fuck dammit, Pol!” Lyra screams throwing her hands to the side making sure every door of those baskets is shut tight. The older twin breaks off into a sprint, desperate to reach his brother in time. This is some fucked up horror movie shit and even though the three of them have powers, he doesn’t wanna mess with whatever otherworldly spirits are livin’ in this place. Forget what he said earlier --he doesn’t wanna deal with supernatural ghosties in an abandoned nuclear explosion site!
“Lyra, open one of the doors!” Pollux calls out, not bothering to look back as he stops in front of the operation booth. He glances inside and sees the lever moving by itself and he nods, impressed.
“You’re doing very well, Lyra!” he shouts to her.
“Pol, you idiot nerd! Get your ugly face here!!” Lyra shouts as she follows behind Castor. Pollux tilts his head to the side.
Idiot nerd…?
He turns back and his eyes catch sight of his brother and Lyra, running towards him like madmen. “Ah...just so you know, I don’t want to share a basket with either of you.”
“Pol we’re fucking leaving! NOW!” Castor leaps through the railings and grabs his brother’s arm. “MOVE!”
Pollux has no time to process this. He finds himself being dragged away by his brother for some weird reason. Glancing back at the spinning ferris wheel, he says, “What are you doing? I wanted to ride that.”
They meet up with Lyra and Castor holds her wrist with his other hand, pulling the both of them away.
“Pol, what the fuck? That wasn’t me!!” She looks back at the moving ferris wheel. Pollux lets her words sink in before he pulls his wrist away from Castor’s grasp, stopping midrun.
“You mean to say...that’s moving on its own? This is a supernatural occurrence?”
Castor skids to a stop, nearly tripping over himself but he doubles back and grabs Pollux again. “It fucking is! Pol, we gotta--”
“This is amazing.” Pollux cuts him off. “Let’s go back, I want to see if there are occupants inside the bas--”
“FUCK YOU WE ARE LEAVING!!!!!” Castor yanks him forcefully, the adrenaline pumping through his veins helping him pull Pollux away from that place.
Lyra keeps looking back, making sure nothing is following them -- not the kids who used to fill the park. Her skin crawls just imagining their laughs.
“They haven’t left.” Lyra says under her breath. “Did they choose to stay or are they trapped?” She won’t stay there to get an answer.
The scene behind her would send a chill down their spines though --well, except Pollux. The swings are moving by themselves, the bumper cars shaking, the empty booths rattling as though someone is shaking them. The ferris wheel spins faster before the machine groans and comes to an abrupt stop, making a loud noise as the baskets are all jolted, each swinging violently. The moment the ferris wheel stops, everything stops moving as well --the swings drop, the cars freeze, the booths still.
Castor hears the ruckus behind him and a string of curses leave his mouth. He doesn’t dare look back, not wanting to see whatever the fuck is going on behind him. The hair on the back of his neck rises as he gets the weird feeling that he’s being watched. He just tightens his grip on his twin and Lyra, kicking the metal exit open and not slowing his pace. The older twin does, however, hear a sigh behind him.
“This is why I don’t invite you both to places like these.” Pollux mutters darkly as they tear down the streets, eager to be as far away from that place before the sun fully sets.
════════════════════
Our inbox and asks are always open!!
You can also interact with them on their twitter accounts:
Lyra  |  Castor  |  Pollux
If you’d like to support us we have a Ko-fi !
Thank you for reading and for the support!!
17 notes · View notes
lbibliophile-mcu · 5 years
Text
Tony Stark Bingo 2019 Masterpost
Masterpost for the @tonystarkbingo
Tumblr media
I got a blackout!
And far more fills and fill types than I expected when I started, including trying several new art methods (ie. drawing with tongs - DUM-E’s Drawings).
Overall I did (some fills with two types):
Fanfic - 8
Drabble - 4
Poem - 5
Art /craft - 7
Gifset - 2
Picset - 5  (moodboards and screenshot collections)
Links and details for each of the fills are below the cut.
Thankyou to the organisers/mods for encouraging and spreading so much great content!
Babysitting
S1 - WTF Link/s: AO3 Tumblr Fill type: Fanfic [500 words] Characters: Obadiah Stane x Tony Stark Tags: Pre-IM1, young Tony Stark, pillow fort, Obadiah Stane’s B+ parenting Summary Obadiah looks at the construction before him and suppresses a sigh. Apparently, it’s going to be one of those days. Carefully ensuring his jocular ‘Uncle Obie’ tone is in place, he approaches.“Hey, Tony, how ya doing in there?”
Everything and Nothing
T1 - Jealousy Link/s: Tumblr Fill type: Fanfic - drabble Characters: Tony Stark Tags: Public image, retirement Summary: People think Tony Stark has everything. But their ‘everything’ isn’t what he wants.
Arm Catalogue
A1 - Shopping together Link/s: Tumblr Fill type: Image edit for Veto Power Characters: Bucky Barnes x Tony Stark Tags: Bucky Barnes’ metal arm Summary: Tony is maky Bucky a new arm, and has so many ideas for the paintjob. A pity Bucky doesn’t like any of them.
Understanding
R1 - Cannon: MCU (Pre-CA:CW) Link/s: Tumblr Fill type: Gifset Characters: Pepper Potts / Tony Stark Tags: Iron Man 3, PTSD Summary: She tries, but she doesn’t understand what it’s like. And that’s good. Because if she understood - truly understood - that would make her as broken as I am.
TON-E’s Valentine [DUM-E’s Drawings]
K1 - Arc Reactor Link/s: AO3 Tumblr Fill type: Art  Characters: DUM-E x Tony Stark Tags: Tony Stark has a heart, method drawing Summary: DUM-E was learning about Valentines day. He knew that you gave a card to someone you care about. He knew that it was supposed to show a heart. So that’s what he drew.
Aftermath
S2 - Writing format: Unreliable narrator Link/s: AO3 Tumblr Fill type: Poem and moodboard Tags: Avengers (2012), collateral damage, outside POV Summary: When real life superheroes saved New York, it was like a something out of a story. But then the cleanup began. And continued, and continued... New York, Greenwich, Sokovia, Lagos. Suddenly, superheros are a lot less exciting. Rubble all looks the same, whether it was made by the heroes or the villains.
RUI (Rescued Under the Influence)
T2 - Confessions under the influence Link/s: AO3 Fill type: Fanfic [1300 words] Characters: Bucky Barnes / Tony Stark Tags: First meeting, rescue, non-consensual drug use, drugged confessions Summary: When Bucky entered the base, he expected to find Hydra agents (to be destroyed) and computer files (to be copied if useful, then also destroyed). He was not prepared to find a drugged Tony Stark. Nor was he prepared for Stark's reaction to seeing him. How does he deal with someone being excited to meet him?
Lab-yrinth
A2 - Labyrinth Link/s: Tumblr Fill type: Art / Puzzle Characters: DUM-E Tags: Maze, Tony’s workshop Summary: Help DUM-E find way through the lab to get TON-E a smoothie.
Avalanche
R2 - Sharing body heat Link/s: AO3  Fill type: Fanfic [1600 words] Characters: Steve Rogers x Tony Stark Tags: Steve Rogers needs a hug, nightmares, touch-starved Summary: Sometimes, all it takes is little things. A minor annoyance that leads to another and another and another. Until it all comes crashing down and you are helpless to stop it or escape.Waking up in a new century was hard, but Steve thought he was coping. (He wasn’t.)
Befriending a Cat
K2 - Cat!Tony Link/s: AO3 Tumblr Fill type: Fanfic - drabble sequence  [600 words] Characters: OG6 Avengers team x Tony Stark Tags: 5+1 format, Domestic Avengers, metaphorical cat Summary: Befriending Tony Stark, the Avengers decide, is rather like befriending a cat.
He loves me, he loves me not...
S3 - image [’Proof Tony Stark has a heart’ plaque] Link/s: Tumblr Fill type: Art Characters: Pepper Potts / Tony Stark Tags: IM1, pining, arc reactor Summary: Pepper Potts knew she was falling in love with her boss, and tried to find subtle ways to show it. What she didn’t know, was if he liked her back…
Flashbacks
T3 - Sickfic Link/s:  Tumblr Fill type: Poem and moodboard/image edit Characters: Tony Stark Tags: PTSD, mentions of torture and near-death Summary: PTSD flashbacks are never fun, and now his brain has a whole selection of scenes to choose from…
Iron Man themed braid
A3 - Free Link/s: Tumblr Fill type: Craft Tags: Iron Man theme, weaving Summary: Tablet woven braid made with crochet cotton. Iron Man colours with pale blue triangular ‘arc reactors’.
Shoot for the Moon
R3 - Galaxy Link/s: Tumblr Fill type: Image edit / gifset Characters: Tony Stark Tags: Quote, story arc Summary: “Shoot for the moon. Even if you miss, you’ll land among the stars “
DUM-E’s list of what not to put in a smoothie  [DUM-E’s Drawings]
K3 - Historical Link/s: AO3 Tumblr Fill type: Art Characters: DUM-E Tags: DUM-E at MIT, method drawing Summary: It took a while for DUM-E to get the hang of the whole making (edible) smoothies, so he left himself notes as a reminder.
Honestly, Pepper
S4 - Writing format: Non-linear Link/s: AO3 Tumblr Fill type: Fanfic [960 words] Characters: Pepper Potts x Tony Stark, Avengers team  Tags: Dialogue only, non-linear narrative, domestic Avengers, disaster Avengers, crack Summary: Pepper Potts, CEO and sometimes superhero-wrangler, walks out of the elevator onto the Avengers Tower common-floor and stops in shock. How is this even her life? And why is she not surprised?
Cuddle Pile (Whose limbs are these?)
T4 - Puzzle Link/s: AO3 Tumblr Fill type: Poem and moodboard Characters: OG6 Avengers team (including Pepper Potts and Bucky Barnes) Tags: Avengers family, romantic/platonic OT8, song parody Summary: After a hard day/night/fight, nothing is better than curling up in a pile with all your friends… at least, until someone has to get up
Hey, Remember Me?
A4 - Amnesia Link/s: AO3 Tumblr Fill type: Fanfic [560 words] Characters: Scott Lang x Avengers team Tags: Based on the Endgame teaser trailers, time travel, post-Snap, amnesia, open ending Summary: The Snap didn’t just kill half of all life, it erased it from existence; first the physical form, then their more intangible presence. For those who remain, it’s hard to maintain the drive to fix things when you don’t remember what you’re missing…
TON-E’s Hero [DUM-E’s Drawings]
R4 - Tony in workshop Link/s: AO3 Tumblr Fill type: Art Characters: Dum-E x Tony Stark Tags: Tony’s workshop, DUM-E’s fire extinguisher, lab safety, method drawing Summary: TON-E is not very good at remembering about lab safety. That is why DUM-E has to be ready to protect him!
Curse of a Superhero
K4 - Clint Barton / Hawkeye Link/s: Tumblr Fill type: Fanfic - drabble Characters: Clint Barton x Tony Stark Tags: Family, angst Summary: Sometimes Tony wonders how Clint did it; managed to be both a father and an Avenger, balance duty to his family with duty to the world.
No Shit, There I Was, Undercover at a Gay Bar...
S5 - Undercover in a gay bar Link/s: AO3 Tumblr Fill type: Fanfic [1200 words] Characters: Clint Barton / Tony Stark Tags: Pre-slash, identity porn, undercover as gay Summary: No shit there I was, undercover in a gay bar... and you'll never guess who I ran into and how.
Legacy
T5 - Confessions in desperate situations Link/s: AO3 Tumblr Fill type: Poem and moodboard Characters: Pepper Potts / Tony Stark, James Rhodes x Tony Stark Tags: palladium poisoning Summary: Tony is dying. It's an inescapable fact; the clock ticking down with every burnt-out reactor core. He tries to tell them, but the words won't come. He can only give them pieces of his legacy, and hope they forgive him.
I Came Out to Have a Good Time...
A5 - image [bruised Tony in the F1 racing suit] Link/s: Tumblr Fill type: Gifset Characters: Vanko x Tony Stark Tags: Iron Man 2, Monaco race, car crash Summary: Tony is Done with villains interrupting his days off.
Status Report
R5 - Last chance Link/s: AO3 Tumblr Fill type: Fanfic [1300 words] Characters: JARVIS x Tony Stark, OG6 Avengers team Tags: Dialogue-only, Major character death, heavy angst, self-sacrifice, AVALON protocol Summary: Iron Man is a superhero, but Tony Stark is only human. And sometimes, what is asked of a superhero is more than a human can give. So Tony makes contingency plans. He makes the AVALON protocol. He makes sure that Iron Man is able to help the Avengers even when human Tony Stark… can’t.
Faith, Against all Logic
K5 - Robots Link/s: Tumblr Fill type: Poem - drabble Characters: FRIDAY x DUM-E x U, Tony Stark Tags: Post-IW, bot feels Summary: Tony is lost in space, and Friday doesn’t know what to do. Her big brothers give her some advice.
6 notes · View notes
pinkykitten · 6 years
Text
The Maze
Thomas x Taylor 
Warning: death, violence, cursing, spoilers (if u have not seen the movie dont read this)
Specifics: angst, fluff, romance, comedy, gifs, pics, aesthetics, oc, oc story, plus size, 600 followers competition 
People: too many to put down srry 
Words: 15,987 (omg this is the longest thing ive ever written in my life)
Requested: By @fyeahtaylorp (cannot tag) Ok so My OC’s name is Taylor she’s 5,5, plus size, blonde hair, blue eyes, and she’s sassy and confident most of the time. I was thinking maybe rebel Wilson as the actress she resembles. I want her to be with Thomas from the maze runner. I was thinking that they meet in the maze and she’s been there longer than him and they start as friends but when they escape the maze they grow closer especially after she’s taken away from the group when they get to wicked. Maybe she’s scared Thomas is into Teresa or Brenda but he’s is in love with her and she finds that out when he thinks something has happened to her and idk how to end it 😅😂
Authors Note: FINALLY IM ABOUT TO POST THIS AGHGHGHGHGH i am so srry this took so long ive been stressed lately and dealing with some personal issues but omg im so happy how this came out! i hope u guys like it as well and also its super long lol im srry. couple of things, i did not re read this cuz its too much so if there r mistakes then u know im not surprised. also i made my mind that i am not doing this every 100 more followers i get instead its every 300 more followers i get so next time i do a oc competition story will be when i reach 900 followers or if i lol thank u guys for the follow and i am totally getting back to writing i have a lot of things coming up that im excited for yay! hope u enjoy and thank u for requesting! 
previous oc story for my 500 followers: Erik Killmonger x oc Calantha Morrison 
Tumblr media
“Stephen, Stephen...I need you. I’m scared.”
With a fright she woke up. Not understanding if her thoughts in her head while she slept were a dream or a reality. Everything she had just played in her mind was like a memory, it was as if Taylor lived through them.
She saw the sun beginning to rise, this was a sign to show her it was the start of the day. Her life seemed to be endless, it seemed to have no meaning. Everyday was unknown, unknown of where she came from or anything before the maze. She was stuck with many, many other young boys around her age, and some younger. It was unfair she felt to her and to the others.
“Where did I come from?” Taylor would ask herself from time to time, really pondering on that question.
As Taylor got up to start the day she got dressed in her ripped jeans and her long sleeve shirt, wearing her boots with it. “Time to begin the day.” She breathed out into the cool air but then she felt her most prized possession. Without even realizing she lifted her hand to touch her necklace. When she first arrived at the maze she was left with the necklace. It must mean something, but if only she knew what it meant, or who gave it to her? What did it signify?
“Hey Newt, hope you slept well,” Taylor smiled as she met with Newt for breakfast her stomach rumbling at the smell of Frypan’s food.
Newt chuckled, patting her arm as the walked to the others, “someone sounds hungry-
Taylor playfully hit his arm, “what’s that supposed to mean?
Newts face went pale as he thought that he had hurt Taylor’s feelings, “oh my, I’m sorry Tay.” She just laughed, “you’re fine Newt. But a girl’s gotta eat!”
Newt laughed at her statement and flung his arm over her shoulders, patting her soft arm in the process. They both walk to the breakfast area. Taylor sniffs the air and motions her way to the food. 
Tumblr media
Taylor wiped her mouth as she stood up, enjoying her breakfast especially since she spent it with her friends. It was tough being the only girl in the Glade. Nobody there understood her, they tried to but it was difficult. It was just biology, she was a female and they, they were inexperienced boys. 
As Taylor’s boots trudged through the high, green grass she looked at the huge stone cold walls. The maze it what made everything in life seem impossible. Taylor stared at it, maybe if she stared at it long enough it would go away, but sure enough the concrete barriers were still there, almost seeming to laugh at her. 
“Hey you okay Tay?” Newt asked, concerned as he placed his hand on her shoulder. A smile growing on his lips. 
Taylor nodded and laughed, “yeah I was just thinking thats all. So these tulips, they are very beautiful.” Your hands landed on the flowers of Newt’s garden. The petals were soft and the scent was so pleasing. “Good job Newt, these are gorgeous!”
“Well, you helped me out with them, remember?”
Taylor chuckled, “yeah, I do.” She went to start by getting more suitable dirt for the produce and started taking out any weeds. Then watering them and adding food. 
As Taylor was about to replant some items she heard a lot of commotion coming from, “the box...”
Taylor sprinted to the elevator. All the boys were making a commotion. She squeezed through them and saw...him. Her heart started to beat fast as his light brown eyes met hers. Her blue ocean eyes widened when she saw him. She felt like she had met this boy before but she didn’t know where or how. When the boy’s face lands on her he seems to take a pause and as if inspect her. Gally takes him out of the box and they all corner him, not giving the newcomer space. 
“Hey guys give him some space!” Taylor shouted at the other boys, pushing them away from the newbie. Just then the newcomer makes a run for it. 
“We got a runner!” One of the kid yells. 
Taylor mentally slaps herself at how the others treated the new one. As the new boy falls and trips on the grass, Taylor motions to him. 
“Hello new one, I’m Taylor.” She stuck out her hand, a smile on her face. “Welcome home.”
Taylor and Newt show the ropes to the new kid, him still not remembering his name which she told him he will later on remember but his past will be always forgotten. She explained how everyone in the Glade has a job. “Alby, our leader, was the first one here, but we all have jobs here. Newt likes to garden.”
“And what do you do?” The boy asked, really interested in Taylor. 
Taylor put her hands on her hip all sassy, “well me-”
“Oh no here we go,” Newt laughed, knowing Taylor was about to make a speech of how important and how amazing her job is. 
“I’m a map maker. We have our runners who run the maze and every time they finish the maze they come to me! They tell me whats changed and what to add more. Its a team work and yes Newt to me it is one of the most important jobs. Just saying!”
As Taylor said this the runner came out of the Maze before it closed. 
With Newt’s permission Taylor shows the boy all the different areas and just a little bit about everything of his new home. 
They two sit on a log by the fire with the rest of the kids. Taylor hands the boy a drink to which he thinks taste bad. 
“So out there,” the boy points to the maze. “What happens out there?”
Taylor knew what horrible monster crawled those wall but she did not want to scare the new one, “I don’t really know, remember I’m no runner and for good reason. I could never run all that, I’m too slow.”
The boy laughs, “does anyone stay the night in the maze?”
Taylor shakes her head, her golden blonde hair also moving with her, “no, they wouldn’t survive. I don’t think, but any ways this is your first day here. Lets not worry about those things and instead worry about you having some fun tonight.” She saw the boy was not having it and was not wanting to have fun. With a sigh she sat firmly next to him. “Do you see those stars?”
The boy looks to the black sky, “there are millions of stars.”
“Yeah but these are yours.” She grabbed the boy’s hand and lead him to a bright twinkling star. “I can see that you are going to do just fine here. In fact many will trust, respect, and one will truly love you forever. Your time here will be something of learning and teaching to everyone.”
The boy nodded with surprise, “you got that all from that star, or are you just trying to make me feel better?”
“The stars never lie Greenie.” She puts her hand out to him as he takes it. They stand up to talk somewhere more private but as they do Gally throws a guy to the boy. 
They both start competing. “Okay Gally thats enough, he’s new here!” Taylor shouts to him over the other boys screaming and cheering. As she thought that the newbie would not win he pushes Gally to the floor. Everyone including Taylor cheers for the boy, but Gally kicks him making the greenie fall on his head. 
“My name is Thomas.” The boy stands up screaming with pure joy. “My name is Thomas, its Thomas!”
“Hooray for Thomas,” Taylor exclaims, slapping a hand on Thomas’s shoulder. The crowd goes wild for him. 
“Welcome home Thomas,” Alby says as he hand him a drink. 
Tumblr media
The next day was hectic. One of the runners named Ben was stung by a griever and he attacked Thomas. Taylor heard the commotion and helped Newt hit Ben on the head with a shovel. Then Alby told the boys to lift Ben’s shirt. Seeing the stung made Taylor’s heart ache, she can see the pain and sadness of knowing in Ben’s eyes. She left with tears in her eyes. 
Taylor, Chuck and Alby all sat Thomas down to explain what had happened, to explain the nightmares that lay beyond those walls. 
She knew what was to happen the next day though. Ben is forced to enter into the maze and left their to die. There is no cure for the stung. Seeing this made Taylor cry, hating the outcome of life. 
Later on, Minho who is the lead runner and Alby go in the maze to retrace Ben’s steps. 
As Taylor awaited for them she spent the time with Thomas. Her hands were sweaty and she was nervous for them. Thomas made her feel safe and better. 
“I’m scared Thomas. I wish Ben’s life would not have ended that way, I hate when this happens.”
Thomas grabbed her hand and reassuringly rubbed his thumb over her knuckles. The action made Taylor blush and feel some sort of attraction to the newbie. “Every things gonna be fine Tay, remember the stars.” He smiled to her as he moved a piece of stray hair behind her ear. 
Taylor held onto Thomas’s hand and onto her necklace, just awaiting for the others. 
Finally at dusk Taylor and the others wait my the entrance of the maze. The doors have opened but there is no Minho or Alby. Taylor’s heart starts to pound, fast. She is frightened and scared. With her left hand to her lips she quickly searches for Thomas’s hand, her right soft one clasping his calloused hand.
“Why are they taking so long.” She whispered under her breath, clutching onto Thomas hand harder. 
“C’mon guys can’t we send someone after them?” Thomas asked, already looking worried. 
Gally squatting by the floor says, “that’s against the rules.”
Taylor rolls her eyes and massages her temple. 
“Either they make it back or they don’t.”
Newt looks at Taylor and Thomas, “can’t risk loosing anyone else.”
Suddenly, a huge gust of wind blows at the group awaiting. Taylor puts her arm up to shield herself from the particles in the wind. 
Then the maze gears start to turn and the maze walls start closing slowly. 
“Oh no,” Chuck whispers. 
“No please no,” Taylor starts to panic. Seeing the door start to close. 
“There,” points Thomas. 
In the distance of the maze Minho is carrying Alby, it seems as if he is hurt. 
“Oh my god look there right there,” Taylor shouts, feeling happy that she sees them, but they are so far away. 
“Wait something is wrong,” Newt points out. 
“Oh no,” Taylor says worried. 
“C’mon Minho you can do it!” Shouts Chuck. 
The rest of the boys start to cheer for Minho, Gally saying for Minho to leave Alby there. 
“C’mon Minho, hurry Minho! You can do this!” Taylor screams as loud as she can. Her heart racing every second that goes by. 
“They’re not gonna make it,” Newt and Taylor realize. 
“They’re too far away,” Taylor cries, tears going down her face. 
The maze walls getting close to shutting fully Taylor is at this point gripping Thomas arm so hard. 
Minho screams as he tries to drag Alby to the entrance of the maze, going as fast as he can. 
“He’s not gonna make it,” Taylor whispers. Every one is screaming, shouting, trying to push Minho to go faster. She looks around to all the scared faces, all the faces that seem to have hope. Taylor looks in front, feeling helpless as she cries more. 
Thomas realizes what must be done and without a second thought he runs ahead with only a few inches left until the maze closes. 
“NO THOMAS!” Taylor screams in a high pitched scream as she tries to grab Thomas. 
Tumblr media
Everything else was like a flash before her eyes. Her Thomas was gone. 
“NO!!!!”
The door to the maze fully closed and Taylor fell onto the dirt, crying, knowing Thomas, Minho, and Alby were already gone. 
“No Thomas, why?” She cried as she wrapped herself in her sweater, wanting to feel his hand once again. 
Tumblr media
She waited there all night, wrapping herself tighter in her sweater, clutching onto the necklace. 
“Taylor, you can’t stay here all night.” Newt said as he sat beside her, looking up the maze. 
“Yes I can and I will. Did you see what Thomas did Newt? He risked his life,” she stood up and placed her delicate cold hands on the stone wall. “He is  a hero, Newt. He’s probably scared, I just,” she gave a big sigh. “I just want him to be safe. He was one of the good ones, I saw it.”
Newt nodded his head and stayed with Taylor for as long as he could, when it was time to go to sleep he left Taylor with her thoughts. Taylor traced over the names of those who had passed away. Scolding herself for thinking that the name Thomas would be carved there. “C’mon Thomas, you gotta make it. You just gotta.”
Tumblr media
When morning came Taylor was the first one waiting there for them. Her feet tapped subconsciously on the dirt floor. 
The door of the maze opened up and Taylor, Chuck, Newt and some others were there as well. Taylor held onto Chuck’s hand and he hugged her, trying to reassure here. 
“I’m here for you Taylor,” Chuck said.
“Thanks Chuck.” Chuck was like a little brother to Taylor. He was such a happy boy and just so kind it made her feel thankful to know him. 
Taylor and Chuck were so hopeful, just wanting to see the others there at the entrance of the maze. 
But nobody was there. 
“Told you guy,” Newt started. “they’re not coming back.”
Every one was starting to loose faith as they walked away, preceding with their life. Not Taylor though and Chuck. They stood and waited. 
Taylor looked down, starting to also loose faith as she didn’t see them coming. 
“No way,” said a boy as Taylor lifted her head she saw...
them. 
“Yeah!” Cheered Chuck. 
“Oh my god, yes! Yes!” She started to squeal. Taylor was overjoyed and so happy to see them. 
Thomas and Minho both worked together in saving Alby. They made it through the doors and laid Alby on the floor. 
Taylor’s eyes started to become glassy, they were starting to tear up at the sight before her. 
“You saw a griever?” Chuck asked, looking at Minho and Thomas. 
“Yeah I saw one.” Thomas said, out of breath. 
Minho shook his head, “he didn’t just see it, he killed it.”
The whole group looked at Thomas, shocked. Taylor smirked and hugged Thomas, “I knew there was something special about you.”
Thomas chuckled and hugged Taylor back. 
Tumblr media
They arrive back to the hut where they all sit down and discuss what has changed within the maze. 
“This is where the magic happens,” Taylor whispered to Thomas as she gave him a wink. As they walked in there laid the map. It was unlike any other map. It was not made out of paper, no, it was made out of sticks, rocks. It showed where turns were made, how abstract the maze truly was. 
“Wow, this is what you guys do?” Thomas asked, mesmerized by how Taylor and her team had built the maze replica. 
“Yeah, now you’re a part of it.” Taylor bit her lip, trying to hold in her immense smile knowing now she gets to spend moments with Thomas. 
Thomas looks up at Taylor and grins at her, “well first off we went through here.”
Thomas and Minho sat in front of Taylor, telling her every little detail on how the maze has changed. They place the rock that they had written each section of the place and put it in its proper area.
Thomas peers around the room which makes Taylor uncomfortable. The room is dark, dull, it smells of copper, so much that someone could taste it. Taylor was the same way when she peered into the map making room, to her it was a bit scary, but if it was going to save the lives of all these kids, she would sacrifice her nose smell for a little bit. 
As Taylor listens to Minho’s route she stares intently at one piece, “hey maybe this is a pattern?”
The group discussed all night, for many hours. Words exchanging, ideas, thoughts, it was a long, long night. 
Tumblr media
The next day as Taylor is tending to the garden she hears the unusual sound. The creaking of the box. 
“Guys! Guys come check this out!” She shouts as she runs to the elevator. The others arrive as well and the person that is shown shocks every one. 
“What in the world?” Some ask as they stare at this...
“Its a girl...,” Taylor crawls in the box as she stares at another girl. She’s not just the only girl anymore. A part of her feels happy and glad but another part of her feels, jealous. She did not understand why.
Newt jumps in as well, “yeah you’re right Tay...its another girl.”
They all stare in amazement and curiosity. Why would they be sent another girl? 
“Whats in her hand?” Gally asks. Newt takes out the paper in her hand and written on the small piece it says, ‘shes the last one ever’. Taylor’s face looks confused, what could this mean?
“What the hel* does that mean?” Newt looks up at Taylor. 
The new girl suddenly wakes up with a gasp, her breathing very hard. As she is struggling to regain her breath she utters only one name, “Thomas...”
The boys and Taylor look at Thomas, expecting him to know why this new girl said his name. He gave a look back of unknowing. 
Tumblr media
As the three, Taylor, Thomas, and Minho discuss more about the maze in the map room some boys come around to the entrance. 
““What are you guys doing? You’re not allowed here,” Taylor tries to shoo them off but they stand their ground. “But its the girl.”
“What is she awake?” Thomas questions. 
The two boys look at each other then at Taylor’s group, “yeah well, you can say that.”
As Taylor runs to where the new girl is at Chuck chuckles and points up, “Girls are awesome.”
Taylor shoots him a face of annoyance, “really shank? Now you realize that?” She looks up to see the newbie throwing rocks at the boys down below. “Are you serious?” 
The boys have shields and are trying to diffuse the situation. 
“We just want to talk,” intervenes Thomas, but still the new girl keeps throwing rocks. 
“Let me handle this,” Taylor says as she stand in front of the boys. “Hello there fellow girl. How bout me and you talk? Just us girls only, hmm?”
The girl pauses with the rocks for a moment and that lets Taylor go up. 
As she climbs up she sees the girl there, huddled probably scared. 
“Hi there,” Taylor greets her with a smile. “Don’t worry none of the boys are coming up.”
“You’re a girl?” The new one asks, looking at Taylor up and down. 
Taylor nods, “yeah, I’m the first girl. Its nice to see another one, lets me have closure. Knowing I can relate to you.”
“How come I can’t remember anything?”
“Don’t worry, that happens to us all. I don’t remember anything, my past, memories, they are all gone. All I have is this to remind me that I did have a past.” Taylor pulls up her necklace for the new girl to see it. 
“Its beautiful.”
“Thanks, now you might remember your name a few hours from now or the next day.”
“My name is Teresa.”
Taylor is shocked a little. The new girl remember’s her name already. Something was way off about this Greenie. “Well Teresa my name is Taylor, nice to meet you.”
Behind Taylor climbs a Thomas. Teresa quickly pulls out a machete and points it at him. 
“Hey, whoa, whoa, whoa, easy alright?”
“Yeah its okay Teresa, he’s one of the good guys,” Taylor smiles at Thomas. Thomas gives a little grin to Taylor at the comment she said. 
“So your name is Teresa?” Thomas asks as he settles next to Taylor. Teresa nods while Thomas introduces himself. “Teresa, I’m Thomas. But you already knew that, I guess, huh?”
Teresa still pointing the blade at Thomas looks to Taylor, “they said I kept saying his name in my sleep.” She turns to look at Thomas, “who are you?”
“He doesn’t know either,” Taylor says. “No one here remembers anything. We are just like you.”
Thomas places his hand on Taylor lap, “yeah, shes right. We all woke up in that box just like you. We are all the same. So I’m gonna take this.” Thomas takes the machete out of Teresa’s hand and gives it to Taylor. “Okay.”
Taylor let out the breath she had been holding. Taylor and Thomas stood by with Teresa, to make sure she felt safe. But there were so many questions that needed answering. 
Tumblr media
Thomas, Minho, Winston, Zart and Frypan enter into the maze. Taylor says her goodbyes to them but as Thomas is about to leave Taylor meets with him. 
“I wanted to give you something before you go.” Taylor hands Thomas a sheet of paper, on the paper is drawn a butterfly on a flower. It looks so realistic and it is shaded nicely. “Its a little something so you remember me in there.”
Tumblr media
Thomas smiles and brings Taylor into a long, tight hug. “I’m gonna miss you,” he murmurs in her ear. 
Taylor does not want to let go. She wants to keep holding onto him forever, “Please be careful out there. Please come back to me.” She cradles his face with her hands giving him a painful goodbye. He lets go and enters in the maze with the rest of the boys. 
When they return Gally states that Thomas has jepordized the peaceful relationship between the Gladers and the Grievers. 
“Really Gally? Just because they found that device inside one? Maybe that could be a way out!” Taylor tried to reason with him. But it was no use. Gally wanted him punished. 
“Wait a second, why don’t we just make Thomas a runner?” Newt suggested patting Taylor’s back knowing she would back him up on this idea. 
“That’s a great idea, second-in-command.” She expressed and put more emphasize on second-in-command to show he was high in social level. “Thomas would make a great runner.”
So it was made, Thomas ended up being designated as a runner. 
Minho guides Thomas to the maze Taylor built again. Now its more important than ever to really pay attention to the model since the boys found some new clues. 
“Three years,” Taylor says as she walks around the table where the model is being displayed. “Three years of exploration and finally now, now that you Thomas are making a difference, we are actually getting somewhere.”
Thomas places his hand on Taylor’s waist making Taylor blush. Minho spots the attraction between them and gives a smirk. He coughs and raises his brow, “...well then, along with what Taylor said the Maze’s numbered sections open and close in a regular sequence, that might be a code.”
Taylor peers at the device and then at the model of the maze. “Yeah, look. The device is numbered to correspond to a certain section within the maze. With this device we may be able to actually escape!”
This was good new to every one. Finally, a chance to escape, finally a chance to see the other world. That hope that Taylor longed for just seemed so out of reach mere seconds ago, yet when she says the plan it seems as if now it is lightly grazing her fingertips. Like she can feel it.
Tumblr media
Taylor walks in on Teresa with two syringes. Taylor gave a face of curiosity. She did not know what liquid was in those shots and yet before Taylor could ask, Teresa already stuck it into Alby. 
“What did you do to him?” Taylor raised her fists to Teresa but she just put her hands up in defense. 
“Its okay Taylor!...Its okay. This is gonna help him.”
Taylor side eyed Teresa, “How do I know you’re not lying, hmm?”
Teresa shrugged, “you’re just gonna have to trust me.”
Taylor angry leaves the hut that Alby is in and goes into the woods to read and draw, trying to block out her. Taylor was not one to feel self-conscious, or jealous but when she saw Teresa she felt those evil things. When she saw Teresa with Thomas the anger boiled more within her. Taylor knew in her head that Teresa and Thomas must have had history together so Taylor knew she did not have a chance, and the thin girl always wins. 
That day Thomas and Minho again went into the Maze. When they came back Thomas was oddly happy to see Taylor. 
Thomas ran up to her and gave her a big hug. 
“Whats this for?” Taylor chuckles, deepening the hug. 
“Tay,” Thomas puts his hands on her cheeks, it looks as if he is about to kiss her. “We may have found a way to get out of here, to get out of this maze. Wouldn't you like that?”
Taylor smiles, “I would love that Thomas.” She then laces her fingers with his wanting to show him that she does care and that he does matter. Thomas looks at the two hands together and starts coming in closer to Taylor but then Gally interrupts and starts to have an argument with Thomas. The argument is cut short when Teresa says that Alby’s awake. Feeling relief Taylor makes her way over to his hut to see how he is doing. 
“Has he said anything?” Minho asks, worry clearly evident in his voice. 
“No,” Teresa answers. 
“Alby, Alby you alright?” Newt asks, looking into Alby’s eyes as he rests next to him on his bed.
“Lets not over crowd him guys. I don’t want to scare him or makes him feel uncomfortable.” Taylor says, standing next to Thomas and squatting to get a good eyes level with Alby. 
“Hey Alby,” Thomas said as he squats next to Taylor. “We might of just found a way out of the maze. You hear me, we could be gettin out of here.”
Alby then whispers the next two words, tears falling down his face. “We can’t...we can’t leave. They won’t let us.”
“What are you talking about?” Thomas asks, uncertain. 
“I remember,” Alby says, making Taylor gasp. 
“What do you remember?” Thomas questions Alby. 
“You.”
“Thomas, what is he talking about?” Taylor’s eyes searching for an answer as she looks to Thomas. 
“And you...Taylor. You two were always their favorites. Always.”
Taylor’s heart started to beat at an uncontrollable rate. She felt unable to breathe. Alby knew something of her past that she doesn’t even know. Did she know Thomas before the maze? Her head was starting to spin, her whole life seemed like a mystery to her. 
“Why did you do this?” Alby’s tears came out more as he stared at Taylor and Thomas. “Why did you two come here?”
There is a lot of commotion outside the tent. The whole group goes outside to see what all the ruckus is when they are met with something of their nightmares. 
That night the maze entrance does not close leaving the Grievers to pour into the glade. It was a war between the Gladers and the monsters. Every one who knew Taylor knew about her fears. One of her fears was spiders, and to her these Grievers looked like gigantic, scary, spiders. Taylor and the rest of the gang tried their hardest to fight against the demons but some won. Some of your group including Zart and the beloved Alby passed due to the fighting. It was a struggle to fight and to try to win. Taylor kept close to Thomas, making sure he was safe before her in any of this. 
As the fight finished Taylor looked around her. The home she knew all these years was broken, it was devastating. All their produce was gone, everything was up in flames. But Taylor did not blame Thomas for any of it, instead she embraced his actions knowing things were gonna change soon. 
Gally came furious to Thomas and punched him, blaming him for all the mess and how the Grievers are now angry with the Gladers. In an attempt to regain his memories, Thomas stabs himself with a  Griver stinger. 
“No! Thomas what are you doing?” Taylor called out to him, catching him as he fell after the impact of the sting. 
Tumblr media
She waits, and waits. Since Thomas was knocked unconscious because of the sting, Gally made it that Thomas was put in a cell. So Taylor waited right next to the cell until Thomas woke up. She kept looking at him and then at her necklace. She felt like all this time she knew Thomas, something within her made her feel some sort of attraction towards Thomas. Like if they were meant to be. 
Thomas woke up, his eyes shooting open as if he were amazed or surprised. 
“Thomas you’re awake!” Taylor shoots him a smile as she combs back her blonde hair with her hands. “I have some bad news for you.”
All the while Taylor is telling him how Gally is going to sacrifice him and Teresa, Thomas cannot stop looking at her with a face. He just stares into those blue eyes, knowing full well the whole story, the reason for that necklace. He knows about her past, her memories. But he chose to keep that inside...for now. 
“Are you okay Thomas?”
“Why do you never give up on me? Like, here, you always takes my side, are always by my side, why?”
Taylor just shrugged, “I don’t know. I just feel comfortable and safe around you. Someone who makes me feel that way couldn’t be bad.”
Thomas smiles and puts his fingers through the cell spaces. Taylor grabs his fingers and with a heart warming grin opens the cell for him. 
Without Taylor, Thomas goes to the other to tell them about what he remembered. As Gally tries to sacrifice Thomas and Teresa, the other Gladers free them and are on their way through the maze. 
Taylor is very much afraid, going through the maze. She is afraid of the what she calls spiders, but the Grievers. As she walks through with the others for the first time Thomas holds her hand in his. 
“I’m here Tay. I’m gonna protect you.”
That made Taylor feel at more ease. As Taylor and the group come face to face with the monsters, Thomas saves and protects Taylor. They make it past through the Grievers, some from the group have passed but the survivors stumble upon a laboratory. 
“What in the hel* is this?” Taylor asks as she and the others see dead scientists and technicians there. “It looks like there was a shootout here or something.”
Suddenly a woman in a video recording shows up. Her name is Ava Paige, she starts explaining that the planet is broken by a solar flare, and then there’s the deadly virus called the Flare that if someone were to have it, it would affect the brain. The Gladers, Taylor, are immune to the flare. She then learns how all this, the maze, the chaos, all the hel* that they were put through was for an experiment. It was to study their brains as it worked as a resistance to the virus. Taylor feels as if she knows the woman, she keeps an eye on her while Thomas stares at Taylor, knowing the full story. 
Taylor can see in the background of the video, these men start coming out in these mercenary clothing and start shooting the others there. Dr. Paige lifts a gun to her head and before she shoots herself she utters these last words, “and remember, W.C.K.D is good.” She pulls the trigger and shoots the bullet in her head. 
Taylor shouts in surprise and puts her face to Thomas’s chest. Thomas pats her back lovingly and looks completely shocked, not knowing what the next step is.
 As Taylor looks back she sees, “Gally?” The whole group turns around and sees that Gally is there. It appears as if he has been stung from a Griever. He has a gun in his hand, his body starts shaking as he starts to tear up. 
“Gally...stop what you are doing. We can talk about this.” Taylor tries to reassure him as she puts her hand in front of Thomas to protect him. 
“We can’t leave.” Gally starts as he shaking his head. 
“We did Gally, we’re out.” Thomas says as he’s on alert mode. Nobody knowing what Gally is going to do next. “We’re free.”
“Free?” Gally laughs as he looks around. “You think we’re free out there? No, no there’s no escape from this place.” He then lifts the gun at the group. Every one gasps and walks back. Thomas tries to reason with him. “Gally listen to me. You’re not thinking straight. You’re not.”
Taylor turns around to see Minho tighten his grip around his spear. 
“And we can help you,” Thomas pleads. “Just put down the gun.”
With his gun pointing directly at Thomas, Gally cries, “I belong to the maze.”
“Just put down the gun,” Thomas says again. 
“We all do,” Gally says as he’s about to shoot. 
“Gally!” Thomas and Taylor scream as Chuck goes in front of Thomas and Taylor. Every thing happened at the speed of light. The gun was shot but Minho threw his spear directly into Gally’s chest. Every one is scared and shocked at the sight before them. Gally is struggling to breathe as he falls atop the broken pieces of glass. Just as Taylor thought everything was going to be okay Chuck starts to breathe differently. 
“Thomas,” Chuck says as he looks at him and Taylor looks down to his chest to see the bullet shot Chuck. 
“No, oh god please no,” Taylor starts crying as Thomas catches him before he fell to the floor. 
“Oh shi*, oh shi*,” Thomas panics as he runs his hands up and down Chucks face and chest, not knowing what to do with the wound. “Look at me, Chuck just hang on.” Thomas tries to talk him into staying alive, giving him words of encouragement. Taylor’s vision starts to become blurry from all her crying. 
As Chuck struggles to breathe he hands Thomas the carving he did that he was going to give to his parents. He is now entrusting that Thomas finish the quest. 
“No, Chuck you’re gonna give that to them, remember? You’re gonna live, my sweet Chuck.” Taylor voice comes out in broken sobs but at the same time her voice is soothing and comforting. Her hands go to stroke Chuck’s curly hair, wanting his death to be as peaceful as possible. 
“Thank you,” Chuck smiles as he looks up to Taylor and then Thomas. His breathing is loud and then...it stops. Those were Chuck’s last words. 
“Chuck? Chuck, hey. Hey, Chuck c’mon! Oh my god!” Thomas sobs as he sees his friend die right in front of him. His eyes still open as he fell asleep in death. Taylor looks up to see the rest of the group crying as well. She starts by putting a hand on Thomas’s back but she as well is sobbing vigorously. “Oh Chuck.”
Suddenly, a door opens and a bright light falls through the room. These men start running in as Teresa calls out for him. Thomas does not care, his tears and crying are all that comes out of him. Taylor puts her hand on her mouth and closes her eyes as she cries some more. The men come in and take the others away, but the pull Taylor and Thomas away from Chuck’s body. As they try to take Thomas away Thomas wiggles out of their grasp and crawls away to Chuck’s body. They pull him away as he cries to let him go. Taylor and the rest run out into a whole landscape of sandy dunes. Every one is ushered into a helicopter. As they throw Thomas in, Taylor grabs him and sits next to him, holding his hand. The masked man reassures the others that they are safe. The helicopter flies up and down below is the maze. Taylor opens her mouth in shock as she sees what the maze truly looks like. All her life that’s all she’s ever know. She was afraid to see what life was like after all this. 
“Relax kid, everything's gonna change,” the masked man says. 
Taylor looks out the window to the new possibilities, to the new future of her life. 
Tumblr media
It had been a couple of years since Taylor was rescued, along with other Gladers, from the maze. They are all taken to a facility by a man named Mr. Janson. He tells the group that the building is a safe haven, it will protect them. That they are protected by WCKD, the virus and the after math of the virus...cranks. He also gives food, clothes, and sanitation. There are also others from different mazes present there.
Taylor met one girl that was also in her shoes. She was part of a maze as well. She was also bigger than most of the girls so Taylor and her had a lot in common. Her name was Jessica. On the first night that they stayed, Taylor felt afraid and unsure but Jessica made her feel welcomed and safe. 
Tumblr media
(this is Jessica: oc, models name is Paloma Elsesser)
During lunch after Taylor would talk with her friends she would then talk with Jessica. 
“Don’t you feel its a little bit...odd.” Taylor asks one day as she stares at the people working at the facility. 
“What do you mean by odd?” Jessica raises her brow. 
“I mean, why would they give us all this? Like what are they really doing behind closed doors?”
“I don’t know about you but I’m happy with having these things. I think you’re just worrying too much.”
Taylor bit her lip as she nodded, “yeah you’re probably right.”
Tumblr media
No...Taylor was very wrong. Thomas and another boy from another maze named Aris Jones went to inspect what was really happening behind closed doors. To Taylor it was horrific. She felt that every one here lied to her. They learned that Dr. Ava Paige is still alive and that Mr. Janson is working for WCKD. Taylor even learned that they were experiment on the immunes and Janson has yet to find the Right Arm, which is a resistance group located in the mountains. 
“Tay, they lied to us. All of us,” Thomas says as he tries to convince her. Taylor nods and hugs him. “Don’t worry Thomas, I would never lie to you. And besides we will always find a way out.” She smiles up at him and as they get closer and closer Jessica interrupts, “Oh am I ruining something here?”
Taylor puts her hand on her hip and chuckles, “no you’re not. C’mon I have a lot of explaining to do with you.” 
The group including Aris and Jessica escape the facility. Everyone runs to the doors as they announce on the speakers the count down. Thomas holds Taylor’s hand as they run while Jessica holds onto Newt’s hand. 
As Thomas tries to put the card in to open the door Mr. Janson and his group show up. The door isn’t opening though. 
“Aw shi*, it looks like its jammed!” Taylor becomes worried as Thomas keeps re trying and re trying. 
“Oh my god we’re not gonna make it,” Jessica bits her nails. 
“Thomas!” Yells rat-face. Everyone starts panicking and they start hitting the door while Thomas grabs the gun he’s holding and points it to Mr. Janson. 
“Open this door Janson,” Thomas comes closer with the gun, while Janson holds his hands up in surrender mode. 
“You really don’t want me to!”
“Open the dam* door!” Thomas screams while Taylor and Minho try to go through the door. 
“Listen to me! I’m trying to save your life. The maze is one thing but you kids would not last a day out in the scorch. If the elements won’t kill you, the cranks will. Thomas, you have to believe me. I only want whats best for you.”
Finally Thomas shows Janson’s true colors, he reveals the secret Janson has been keeping. “Yeah let me guess, WCKD is good?”
Janson becomes agitated and he lets his arms down, “you’re not getting through that door Thomas. 
“Its unlocked!” Taylor shouts as the door starts to move upward. On the other side you are met with Alvis and Winston. “Hey guys.”
“C’mon,” Frypan says as he runs out. Everyone goes except for Taylor. Taylor wants to wait for Thomas so she moves next to him. “C’mon Thomas we have to go! Lets go!” Thomas starts shooting Janson and his men as he backs up with Taylor. The gun stops working and he throws it to the men. As Thomas turns around to run away he grabs Taylor’s hand and they run together to the door with Janson and his men following them. 
Janson says in his watch, “shut the main vault door. Shut the main vault door!”
As Taylor and Thomas are running to the door, the door starts to close. 
“No!” Shouts Teresa. 
Taylor grasps Thomas’s hand so hard as she runs for dear life. 
The group starts to shout at the two of them, “C’mon Thomas, Taylor! C’mon!”
The door almost closes as Taylor and Thomas slide under the small gap that was left. The two make it leaving Taylor so terrified. 
“Oh my god girl you scared me!” Jessica says as she grabs Taylor in a tight hug, helping her get up. “C’mon we gotta go.”
Alvis hits the lock so that Janson cannot get through. As the group is about to leave Winston grabs a gun making Taylor do the same. Thomas sees that Janson cannot get through so he puts his middle finger up, making Taylor laugh. They all run away. Taylor holding onto Jessica’s hand as they make it to the exit. The alarm sounding off. Thomas opens the huge doors and whats shown out there is really a windy sandy place. Taylor’s afraid and she holds onto Jessica’s hand tighter. 
“We got this Tay,” Jessica says with a smile. “We gonna be fine, you’ll see.”
Taylor nods and the group get out and into the scorch. 
Tumblr media
Taylor and the rest end up at an abandoned market place. Its dark and very spooky, no light reaching inside at all.
“Wow its so dark, man,” Jessica puts her hands out in front of her to prove a point. 
Minho then starts the generator and as the lights come on it looks as if people were here before. There are tents and blankets resting on the floor, lights that are strung above the items. More lights keep turning on, lamps, small lights, they keep flashing on. Minho smiles thinking every thing is fine until a, what seems to be a woman, comes slamming on the fence door. Her mouth and eyes are pitch black and she has veins all over her face. 
Minho and Taylor scream in unison, “Thomas watch out!”
“What the hel* is that?” As Taylor stands next to Minho, bringing Thomas back. As those words left her mouth there was more screeching behind them. Taylor, Minho, and Thomas turned around and out came a whole group of them. 
“Oh my god theres more!” Taylor said backing away, her backpack behind her carrying her gun.
One of them came limping to the group but Minho picked up a sledgehammer and smacked the thing with it. 
“What the hell is that thing?” Minho asks, his flashlight shining on them. Out in the distance more of them came, “C’mon we gotta go! We gotta go!” Thomas shouted, pulling Taylor by her jacket with him. Running out the double doors the Cranks are right behind them. Taylor helps the boys to close the door before the crank could come in. 
“Hold it down!” Shouts Minho. 
“What?” Thomas asks. Taylor sees Minho is having some trouble pushing the huge cabinets to cover the door so she goes next to him and helps push. “Watch out Thomas!” Taylor exclaims as the cabinet falls to cover the door. 
Now, cranks are coming out of every corner. “Oh shi*,” Taylor mutters as Thomas grabs her hand and they all run away. Making it up the escalator Taylor follows Thomas but she slips and her foot gets caught in the escalator. Thomas and Minho almost up ahead don’t take notice of her fall. Taylor, panicking tries to take her foot out but it is really stuck. She turns her head back and sees the cranks coming closer. “Thomas! Minho!” Her screams echoes through the building and Thomas turns around not seeing Taylor. 
“Minho wheres Taylor?!?”
Minho shrugs and his eyes widen. “Crap c’mon!” 
Thomas ran like he has never ran in his life, he ran faster than ever in the maze. “I need to help her. Please, oh god please, please be okay.” He thought in his head thinking about Taylor. 
Taylor, still shouting sees the cranks coming closer and closer. She starts to tear up, this is it, this is where she dies. As the cranks are almost to her Thomas and Minho make it and see that indeed her foot it stuck. 
“Oh Tay this may hurt,” Minho winces as he sees her foot, but then he quickens as he sees how many are behind them. “Shi*”
Thomas grabs her hand, “don’t worry Tay, I’m right here. I won’t let anything happen to you.” His other hand is tending to her foot. 
Taylor smiles and puts her head back along with her hands. “I’ll hold them off boys.” She pulls her gun out and starts shooting those that are almost to them. 
“Okay but she’s a badas*,” Minho chuckles seeing even though Taylor hurting she still manages to get the work done!
“C’mon,” Thomas says as he is getting frustrated. Finally they set her free and she sprints in front of Thomas, him still holding her hand to make sure she is safe and with him now 100 percent of the time. 
“I told you we got you,” Thomas smiles as they now run so fast away from the cranks close up on them.
As Taylor, Minho and Thomas sprint ahead they see the rest of their group. 
“We have to warn them!” Taylor said as she started to wave her hands to get their attention and to show panic. 
“Hey!” Shouts Thomas. The rest of the group look at the three running and they wear a curious face. The three yell all different things, warnings, to run, to go away. 
“Why aren’t they moving?” Minho asks as he runs ahead of Taylor. Then Taylor sees their horrified face when they see the cranks running ahead. The others start running as the cranks get closer to Taylor. Taylor, already tired keeps her head in the game. Jumping over man boxes laid on the floor so as not to lose the momentum. A back pack is thrown to Thomas and Taylor assists him in putting it on. The group now rejoined, they make their way up another escalator. As they make their way up a crank appears out of nowhere and the others are scared and taken aback. Aris gets his bat and hits the crank with it. More cranks appear and the group is split up for only a short while. Teresa is split with Thomas while Taylor is put with the others. A crank comes at Taylor and Newt and as it is about to get the two of them Taylor pulls out her gun and aims straight at the cranks head, pulling the trigger. “Bulls eye,” Taylor smirks. Everyone meets up again as they try to make it to the exit. Newt again gets tackled by a crank and Thomas saves him. A whole group of cranks start appearing from the distance to the group of Taylor’s. Everyone runs to a small corridor that is nearby. It is tight and compact and no one knows where they are going. The cranks go into the tiny space as well. Everyone freaks out. 
“C’mon guys move it!” Taylor shouts as it is hard for her to manage in that tight space. They make it to doors but as Thomas and Minho try to open them up they cannot because they are locked. 
“Are you serious right now?” Taylor panics as she combed her hair with her fingers. 
Minho and Thomas try to open it up and Winston shouts, “I’ll hold them back.” He pulls out his gun while Taylor does the same. She stands next to Winston and starts shooting the cranks. Winston smiles at her and she nods, grinning. Frypan finally opens the door and Thomas grabs Taylor’s hand to go through the door first. As Winston tries to go out he gets caught by some cranks and as they try to take him out of the grasps of the cranks the cranks start scratching him on the stomach. Taylor with Minho and Thomas try to close the doors but Thomas sends Minho away. 
“Go Tay, I got this, go.”
“No I’m not leaving you. We do this together.”
Thomas looks at the cranks and at the right time he grabs Taylor’s hands and they both run away together. 
They all spent the night under some debris just waiting for the right time to make a run for it. 
Tumblr media
When they all wake up, Thomas looks out to see if it is safe to leave. In the light of the morning sun Taylor peers around her surroundings and sees how city is in ruins. 
“WCKD is probably still looking for us. We have to move.” Taylor says as she stretches and grabs her gun. She grabs Jessica’s hand and brings her up for a stand. 
As the group trudges along through the sand Winston’s infection is getting worse until he falls down. Taylor can see the pain evident on his face, she feels so sorry for him. She wanted him to make it. She looked at the others face and some knew but some had hope. That was good for him in that moment, to have hope. 
“I’m not gonna make it,” Winston says in a rough, hoarse voice. His breathing is starting to quicken. Everyone looks at each other, not knowing what to do. “Please don’t let me turn into one of those things.”
Taylor feels a tear fall down her cheek, her heart breaking at what she is seeing. Winston pulls his hand out as if to hand something to him. 
Everyone is frozen but Newt goes and takes the gun. Thomas thinks that he’s going to shoot Winston but he doesn’t. Instead Newt gives him the gun, it will be on Winston’s time to do that to himself. 
“Thank you,” Winston manages to say. “Now get out of here.”
“Goodbye Winston,” Newt swallows the pain as he looks into his eyes. 
Everyone leaves until its just Taylor and Thomas. Thomas’s eyes become glassy as he looks at a dying man. “Its alright,” Winston reassures him in his last moments. 
“I’m sorry,” Thomas whispers. 
Winston’s last words were, “Thomas, take care of them okay?”
Thomas nods and leaves with Taylor. 
As they go and move away a gun shot is heard through out. It echoes in the world. Everyone pauses and just takes a time to gather themselves up and proceed. Taylor still has tears coming out but she doesn’t want to make a scene so she tries to compose herself and wipes her tears away. 
Thomas sees this and holds her hand, “hey you know, its okay to cry.” He said it more as a statement then a question. Taylor brought him into a hug and cried into his shoulders, feeling mentally tired and emotionally. But she was determined to make it to the end.  
Tumblr media
Night came and so did sleep, but as the group was in slumber Thomas woke up to a civilization in the distance, but they are also greeted by a thunderstorm. They run to an abandoned building for shelter but as they are running Jessica slows down. Minho helps and tries to save her by helping her in running but he gets struck by the lighting. 
“Minho!” Jessica and Thomas cream in unison. As they take him to the shelter he does indeed survive. Jessica hugs him lightly, not wanting to hurt him and smiles, “thanks Min Min for saving my as*, I am a god dam* slow runner. For real though, thank you.”
They are greeted with chained up cranks. One after enough coming at them but not quite yet making it. 
“I see you’ve met our guard dogs.” A new voice calls out. It is a girl, she walks up to all of the group and smiles, “you guys look like shi*.”
“Hel* I like her already,” Jessica chuckles but Taylor hits her lightly on the chest. “Ow, what she seems pretty okay.”
“We don’t know what she’s like,” Taylor whispered to Jessica. 
“Don’t worry I don’t bite, the names Brenda.”
They meet Brenda and Jorge who lead a dangerous group of survivors. Brenda and Jorge learn that Thomas and his group had come from WCKD and are looking for the right arm they agree to take them to them. 
Moments later WCKD arrives and storms the place but Jorge’s bombs go off and the facility is destroyed. Taylor and Thomas split up. Taylor ends up with Jorge’s group while Brenda and Thomas are left behind. 
Tumblr media
Thomas P.O.V.
Thomas and Brenda escape the cranks but Brenda gets infected by one. Thomas gets another flashback and remembers when he was working for WCKD. He tried to warn Teresa and Taylor about WCKD’s plans but they were all separated by WCKD’s troops. 
Thomas ends up kissing Brenda but as he is kissing her he thinks of...”Taylor.” he breathes out. 
“What,” Brenda asks as she stand back. 
“You are not her.” Thomas wanted that kiss to be Taylor. That was it, he knew he was in love with Taylor. 
Thomas P.O.V. end
Tumblr media
Thoma and Brenda meet up with Taylor and the rest of the group again. Taylor runs to hug Thomas and puts her hands on his cheek, “oh my god. I thought something terrible happened to you.”
Thomas grins and puts his hands on her cheeks, “I’m fine, along with the help of her.” He points to Brenda and Taylor’s heart almost shatters. She can see something, some type of affection going on between the two. 
Taylor nods her head while putting up a fake smiles, “oh thats good. I’m glad you both made it out safely.” She puts her hands down and walks away. First she had to deal with Teresa now Brenda. She clenched her fist knowing how this ends. It will end with either beautiful girls getting the guy and Taylor getting no one. With big girls thats how it always ends. 
Jessica finds Taylor sitting away from the group. “Hey Tay Tay, whats wrong girl?”
Taylor just shrugs, “I know Thomas so well already.”
“What?” Jessica asks as she sits beside her. 
“I feel like I’ve known Thomas, like I’ve known him forever...Jess...I’m in love with Thomas.”
“Oh shi*,” Jessica mutters. 
“Yeah, oh shi* is right and I know he either likes Teresa or Brenda way more than fat old me.”
“Don’t say those things,” Jessica puts her arm over Taylor’s shoulder. “You are way more than that you hear? So what if you got a little junk in the trunk you are special Taylor. You did what other big girls no, what other girls think is impossible. You escaped that maze you escaped WCKD you did so many incredible things. You are kind and sweet but ooh but do you have sass! If Thomas cannot see all the amazing things I see or for who you really are than girl, he is not meant for you. You are a diamond in the rough sand paper sand.” Jessica picks up a pile of sand and this makes them both laugh. 
Tumblr media
(not my gif! do not own)
“Thanks sis, I needed that,” Jessica helps Taylor stand up and they both embrace. 
“What a beautiful embrace, are we celebrating cause we’re not dead ladies?” Minho jokes, waiting patiently for the two of them. 
“Can I get some of that action?” Frypan chuckles as he playfully hits Minho like am I right?
The two side eye them, “No boys were are celebrating us big women...we can do anything, and that boys is a fact.” Taylor and Jessica walk hand in hand back to the group. 
Jorge interrogates Marcus, a survivor works for WCKD, into revealing the whereabouts of The Right Arm.
Tumblr media
The group goes and finds their way arrive at the right arm relief camps. There are other survivors there and they are greeted by a man named Vince. He is the leader and decides if Thomas’s group can stay or not. 
Brenda’s infection worsens and Vince threatens to shoot her. But a former scientist that worked for WCKD stops Vince. “Hello Thomas and hello to you too Taylor.”
“You know me?” Thomas asks the stranger. 
Taylor’s face becomes of confusion, “wait how do you know us?”
“Interesting...it makes sense they put you two in the maze.”
“Thomas, what is she talking about?” Taylor raises her brow. Thomas knows and he looks away. “How does she know who I am? How does she know I was in the maze?” Taylor tries to look into his eyes but he looks away, almost ashamed. “Anybody?” When she looks at the others they too are not looking at her. Jessica pats Taylor’s shoulder. 
“Though I must admit,” the scientist kept going. “I was worried they’d kill ya after what you did.”
“After what you did, Thomas what does she mean?” At this point Taylor was getting furious, she felt like she was invisible. The stranger went to Brenda and tended to her. But she could see that Taylor and Thomas were both searching for answers. 
“What I did?” Thomas asked. 
“The first time we spoke you said you couldn’t take it no more. Watching your friends die one by one. The last time we spoke you gave me the coordinates of every WCKD compound, trial, and lab.”
“He was our source,” said Vince. 
“They couldn’t have pulled this off without him,” the scientist praised Thomas. “Take her [Brenda] to the tent. Get these guys some warm clothes.” They carried Brenda away. As Taylor went to ask Thomas what happened she saw the glances Teresa kept giving Thomas. 
Jessica saw that Taylor’s face was of anger so she placed a reassuring hand on her shoulder, “hey you think you’re gonna be alright?”
Taylor looked into her brown, haze eyes and nodded, “you know me Jess...I’m always alright.”
Jessica smiled and left her. Taylor grabbed harshly both Thomas and Teresa behind one of the tents. “What the hel* was all that back there?” Taylor shouted as anger entered into her. 
“Please Tay, let me explain.” Thomas tried to calm her, putting both his hands on her shoulders. 
“Please, make it quick. Why was she talking about us like she knew us? And you kept giving Teresa a look?”
Teresa looked down and then at Taylor, “Back then before the maze, you had worked for WCKD...”
Taylor’s face became of sadness and disbelief, “no thats not true. That can’t be-”
“It is Taylor,” Thomas whispered as he grabbed her hands. “Before the maze, you, Teresa, and me we all worked for the maze. Sticking our friends in a death maze, we did that. We worked for them. I went, when we were still working for them, to you two and tried to warn you both about WCKD but we were all separated, you were first Taylor, you were first to be put in the maze. Also, when we were working for them me and you were very close to each other...Where do you think you got that necklace?”
Taylor peers down to her chest and sees the necklace, her eyes start to water. Thats why the first time she saw Thomas she felt like she knew him. “You knew all this time and din’t think to tell me? You told her, my story, to her, and not even to me! Why would you keep something like that from me, Thomas?”
Thomas felt ashamed and guilty, “I don’t know Tay, I just-”
“He wanted to protect you,” Teresa butted in. Taylor pointed a finger at Teresa, “I don’t want to be rude, but you better but out right now or so help me god.”
Teresa walked up to Taylor, face to face, body to body, “Or what, Tay? What are you really gonna do to me? Thomas was just trying to protect you, if you really cared about his friendship then you would forgive him and you would accept the decision he made. 
“Yeah Teresa you’re are forgetting one thing, who was the first to be in that maze between us? Who had to live every breathing moment in there with just herself as the only female, and who had to accept that she may never see her family again because she doesn’t even know her history? That information was mine, Teresa, I should have, no, I needed to know that. So protect your boyfriend or your crush but nothing you say will make it better that he kept my life from me.” Taylor pushed Teresa to Thomas and went to go find Jessica. 
The scientist woman comes to Thomas and tells him he needs to give his blood. The scientists lady is Mary Cooper. As Mary halts Brenda's infection using an enzyme cure, Mary explains that the enzyme can only be harvested from an Immune's body, not manufactured, and that arguments over the methods of manufacturing the cure with Ava lead Mary's departure from WCKD.
Tumblr media
After the argument they all had and Thomas helped Brenda Taylor saw Teresa climb these rocks. Taylor felt more angry when she saw Thomas climbing them to get to her, to see whats wrong with her. Taylor went and followed them to eaves drop on their conversation. 
“You okay?” Thomas questioned as he made it to the top and looked at Teresa. Taylor was hidden behind one of the boulder listening. “What are you doing up here?”
“Just thinking.”
“Well I’ll let you be alone.”
“Do you remember your mother?”
“Uh, I think so,” Thomas thought for a while on that question. 
“You remember mine? She’s a beautiful woman. Every body loved her, before WCKD she was all I had. When she got sick, I didn’t know what to do. They just kept her locked up, hidden. I thought she’d get better. Every night she’d make these awful sounds, like screaming. And then one night she just, stopped. It was finally quiet. I went down to her room, there was blood everywhere. And she just sat there calm. She said she was feeling better. The visions were calm, she’d taken care of them. She took her eyes out Thomas. There are millions of people suffering out there. Millions of stories just like mine. We can’t turn our backs on them. I won’t. 
Taylor’s mouth opened in shock, “please no please no.”
“What are you saying?” Thomas hoped she was talking nonsense, he hoped she did not do the thing that they were all running away from. 
“I’m saying I want you to understand.”
“Understand what?”
“Why I did it.”
In the distance there are helicopters and Taylor’s heart sinks, “oh my god they’re here.”
“Teresa...”
“Please don’t fight them Thomas.”
“What are you doing? What have you done?”
Thomas runs down and Taylor sprints in front of his path, “this way Thomas.” Even though Taylor was mad at him still she needed to protect him, she needed to protect her friends. She grabbed onto his hand and they both ran to the others to warn them, but they were too late. The helicopter shot a explosive and the camps blew up, “No!” They both scream in unison. 
There was an ambush by WCKD. As some warned others, other were dead. 
“Tay!” A high pitched scream came out as Taylor looked around she saw Jessica run to her. “Oh my god I thought they got you too.” They both hugged and tried to run away. But there were so many of the WCKD that Taylor knew she had to do something. “Jessica, listen to me, be careful.” Taylor whispered the words to her as she pushed Jessica to Thomas and stood next to Minho. 
���Go guys we got this!” Minho says as he and Taylor start shooting. 
“No, guys come back here,” Thomas shouts over the commotion. They all hide behind a couple of boxes. Just as Minho is re-loading his gun WCKD shoot a device on him that makes his still. 
“Minho!” Thomas screams as Jessica and Newt pull him back. 
“No!!!!” Taylor shouts as she starts shooting uncontrollably but someone from WCKD comes behind her and hits her with the back of their gun, making her fall down and they put the device on her. 
“Taylor!” Thomas and Jessica scream. Jessica gets up and, without any weapons tries to fight WCKD but they shoot her in the stomach. 
“NO!!!” Taylor screams at the top of her lungs. Her heart just breaking. She starts to sob as she tries to crawl to her friend. “Oh my god oh my god,” was all she could say. 
“Its okay Tay Tay, its okay. I’m sorry, I just tried.” Blood spilled and poured from her mouth and her breathing stopped. “No please no Jess, c’mon Jess please Jess. Please don’t go Jess!” Taylor shouted as she held onto her but WCKD dragged Taylor away from the body, her screams so high pitched it hurt anybodies ears. “Please don’t please, Jess!
“Tay, Minho,” Thomas shouted as he tried to get to her and him. But Vince stopped him. Thomas was crying as he looked at Taylor getting taken by WCKD. Taylor felt like her life was gone and she was already dead. As Taylor went inside the helicopter she was greeted by Ava Paige’s presence, Dr. Paige looked beyond and saw the survivors, she saw Thomas. With an evil eye she glared at him. 
Tumblr media
Thomas P.O.V.
The whole place is a disaster. Everything is ruined. Most of the tents were burned up and the survivors are looking for any materials or items that they could save. 
“What do we do now?” Asks Frypan as he looks to the distance, trying to collect himself. 
“I would pick up whats left of us.” Scans Vince as he tries to see if there are others. “Stick to the plan, we take you kids to the safe haven. And we start over I guess.”
Thomas shakes his head and stand up, putting his backpack on. “I’m not going with you.”
Vince looks surprised, “What?”
“I made a promise to Minho and Taylor, I promised that I would protect her. Now she’s probably stuck somewhere scared, afraid, I mean she just saw her best friend die, right in front of her eyes. She means the world to me Vince, I can’t forget about them...I can’t ever forget about her. I have to go after them. ”
“Hey kid look around you,” Vince said, spreading his arms. “A’ight, WCKD just kicked our as*. Think about where you’re headed.”
 “I’m not asking anyone to come with me.”
“Thomas listen to me,” Newt motions to him, caring about his friend. “I’ve known Minho and Taylor for...for as long as I can remember. So if there’s any way we could help, trust me I would be standing there next to you. This what you’re talking about, is impossible.”
Jorge and Brenda appear and Jorge says, “more like suicide.”
“Maybe,” Thomas shrugs. “I don’t know what I’m supposed to do now. It’s not just about Taylor and Minho. Its about all of us. Its about everyone WCKD’s ever taken, everyone they will take. They’ll never stop, they’ll never stop. So I’m gonna stop them. I’m gonna rescue Taylor...and I’m gonna kill Ava Paige.”
Everyone looks at each other rethinking the situation. Harriet speaks up, “I have to admit, I’d like some revenge.”
Vince sees the expression of everyone and decides to just give in and help, “wow its a good speech kid, so whats your plan?” Everyone looks to Thomas for answers. 
Thomas P.O.V. end
Tumblr media
“Hey Minho, Minho...,” Taylor shook the boy as they were in the train to who knows where. “You hear the birds?” Minho from all the torture was already being a totally different person. Taylor wanted to lift his spirits, but on the inside she felt empty and had no hope of being saved. Minho searches for the noise Taylor was talking about and then he does hear it all of a sudden, he turns around to see Taylor copying the noise of a birds chirping. She smiles at the end and makes Minho laugh. 
As she is standing there, all their hands tied by chains, Taylor sat next to Minho. Taylor coughs a little and then starts singing, “I thought I heard the old man say; leave her Johnny leave her. Tomorrow you will get your pay; and it's time for us to leave her.” Music was such an important aspect in her life, it made her feel happy and made her feel as if she could fly. “Leave her, Johnny, leave her! Oh, leave her, Johnny, leave her! For the voyage is long and the winds don't blow. And it's time for us to leave her.” As she sang the last note she looked around to see the other kids there and Minho smiling. “You have a beautiful voice Tay,” Minho chuckled, nudging you. “Wait do you hear that?”
Tumblr media
Taylor’s eyes search up and her head turns in his direction. It was the sound of a running car. “Yeah I do!”
Moments later there are footsteps heard up ahead on the trains roof. Taylor and Minho smile at each other, hopeful. 
Then the train starts to stop, Taylor and Minho falling forward from the harsh movement. Then a familiar voice is calling out, the others on the train are excited and start screaming for them to be rescued. 
“Taylor! Taylor! Minho!” The voice calls out to them two. They look at each other and answer with a crying yes. But are never rescued, they are instead taken back to WCKD to be tortured more. 
Tumblr media
By many doctors Taylor is put in this machine that hooks up to her head. “Please no, not again, please.” They don’t listen to her and strap her in. 
The ocean, the waves calming and relaxing. Taylor is sitting right atop a rock, enjoying a book. In the distance she sees the maze. Her heart starts to beat quickly and she starts to panic. She hates this feeling. Her hands start to tremble. As she looks down in her book the pages start to be covered in blood. Taylor covers her mouth in disgust and tries to throw the book away but it keep landing back on her lap. Then the blood starts to make words. “They are coming for him.”
“Who’s him?” Before she could react a wave crashes on her and brings her in the ocean. She is drowning but then all of a sudden she is in a cell. It is dark, very dark and it is wet and smells horrific. “What the hel*?” Next to Taylor in the cell is Jessica’s dead body, lying there her corpse. Taylor starts to break down and she sobs as she sees her best friend dead. “Oh my god!” But then she hears...it. A griever pops out and tries to get to Taylor but Taylor is separated by the cell. As she is backing away she hears a voice. “Taylor! Taylor!”
“Thomas?” She screams and Thomas meets her, “I’m gonna get you out okay? I will protect you.”
Thomas starts to fight off the griever, by himself and Taylor starts to scream, “No Thomas I need to protect you!” Then Thomas gets stung by the Griever and the griever rips Thomas head off. Horrified Taylor screams on the top of her lungs. 
Taylor hooked to that machine makes her see these things. She screams when nothing is really there in reality with her. The doctors check her eyes and see she has spaced out, she is out of it. She becomes almost brain dead. 
Tumblr media
Only a few times does Taylor see Minho and every time she does he is getting worse and worse. She feels so bad for him. Taylor has tried to escape and tried but it never is successful. 
She sleeps in a cold cell, thinking about her friends and about the stars. How much those starts mean to her. She is mostly out of it from all the torture. She is being scarred for life. She lays there until WCKD arrive to bring her to another torture test or to check her vitals. 
As WCKD takes her to a medical room Taylor sees from the side of her eye Minho beating up Teresa. “That bitc*” Taylor mutters under her breath as she sees Teresa got away and they had to hold Minho down. Taylor chuckles, “thats my boy.”
Teresa makes it out but is scared when she sees Taylor, “you traitor!” Taylor gets out of WCKD’s grasp and makes a run for Teresa. Taylor kicks Teresa and knees her in the stomach. Teresa is on the ground, coughing up and hurting. “Yeah feel that, now imagine that 100 times worse.” Taylor lifts Teresa’s face by her hair so Taylor can see her better. “Thats how it felt when you took everything I loved away from me.” Teresa is crying and they pull Taylor back. “I won’t let you do that to Minho. I wont!”
Tumblr media
Taylor was taken to be tortured again. Her hands in cuffs as if she were a prisoner. Suddenly, the alarm started to blare. The sirens turning on an alarming WCKD that something is wrong. They still took her into the room and went to hook her up. 
Tumblr media
Minho P.O.V.
As Minho escaped the medical room where they were going to sedate him he met up with Thomas and Newt. 
“Minho,” Thomas said, sounding relieved. 
Minho looked to Newt and Thomas, “is this real?” They all smile but then Minho realizes Taylor is about to get tortured now. “Guys Tay’s in trouble, we need to go save her. I know where she is!”
Minho P.O.V. end
Tumblr media
They hooked up all the wires to her brain and they were about to start it when there was a loud bang almost outside the door. All the WCKD doctors were scared, alarmed. One stood up and went to go see what the commotion was. There was another bang and then footsteps. Thomas, Newt, and Minho appeared in Taylor’s room and shot everyone there. A female doctor was about to press the button to put Taylor into that machine but Thomas shot her. 
“Oh my god!” Taylor screamed, strapped to her chair. “I can’t believe its you guys!”
Thomas, quickly, unstrapped Taylor and then picked her up so she was standing right in front of him. He felt his heart beating fast, he felt so happy to see Taylor. Here she was living, breathing, right in front of him. It was like a miracle. He sees though the bangs under her eyes and how she looks drained, tired. “Oh my god Tay, what did they do to you?”
Taylor started to cry but out of joy and happiness that she was saved, “they tortured me. They,” her cries were sobs now. “They made me believe that it was you, Thomas. You were killed and that to me was the worst torture.” Thomas puts hugs Taylor and puts his hands on her cheek. His face showing worry and sadness that Taylor had to go through that. “Its the worst torture to me because I couldn’t protect you Thomas, I couldn’t save you.” Taylor’s blue eyes looked up to Thomas’s brown ones and Thomas just went for it. 
Thomas leaned in, passionately to kiss Taylor. He brought her closer to him. He put his hands all over her curves not caring about them, just loving the girl for who she is and thinking she is the most beautiful woman on the earth. They both closed their eyes in the kiss and it was hard and passionate, his tongue slipping inside just for a minute. Just to have one taste of her. It was full of love. 
Tumblr media
(not my gif! do not own)
Both their foreheads rested on each others and they smiled, “I love you so much Taylor.”
“I love you more, Thomas. I need to say I’m sorry for getting so angry with you not telling me about my past. I get why you did it, you were trying to protect me.” She steps closer to Thomas and takes a hold of his hands while Thomas kisses her lips and forehead. “Its okay Tay, I’m sorry for keeping that away from you. I felt so scared and not sure when WCKD had taken you. You mean so much to me, not Teresa, not Brenda, you.”
Taylor kisses his lips again and sees the boys face in the back. Newt is so over it, rolling his eyes. And Minho looks as if he’s gonna throw up. 
“Are you guys like done. We kinda have to get out of here,” Minho broke the silence. 
Taylor and Thomas chuckle, “wow they are just, wow.”
Taylor nodded, “I know, way to ruin the moment guys!”
Newt rubs his temple, “If I have to see one more kiss I may just leave on my own.” He chuckles at the end. 
Taylor and Thomas laugh and they grab hands and make a run for it. 
As they run they meet some folks from WCKD and they run into a random room. Thomas locks the door. There is someone banging the door from outside, this scares Taylor and she holds onto Thomas for support. “Don’t worry Tay, I got you. I won’t let anything bad happen to you again.”
“Newt c’mon,” Minho goes to a cart and places it in front of the door. 
“Um Thomas, what do we do?” Taylor asks as she sees the huge window in the room. Every one is trying to think of a plan but WCKD  already is using a blade to try to pry the door open. 
“Any ideas?” Minho questions. 
Thomas looks at the window and then back at the group, “maybe.”
“Oh hel* no! You do realize how thick I am, I’m gonna be the first one down there and then you guys will come afterwords and use me as a soft landing.” They all look at Taylor as she said that and she just waves them away, “never mind.”
Every one helps getting a tank through the window. It falls to the water down below. 
“Okay its doable. Just need a little running start.” Thomas says as he goes back. 
“Oh my god are we serious about this? Is he serious? What if that water is shallow, we’ll die Thomas!” Taylor tries to reason with him, her heart thumping out of her chest. They all go next to Thomas, Taylor holding his hand to feel more comforted even though she felt so terrified. 
“You sure about this?” Minho asks, scared. 
Thomas looks at Taylor and shakes his head, “not really.”
Minho rolls his eyes, “nice pep talk.”
“Yeah, I’m bloody inspired.” Newt says too. 
“Ugh we’re gonna have to do it,” Taylor cracks her neck and is prepared, putting on her game face. But the door flies open and Janson comes through, angry. “Fuc* it!” Taylor says as the group runs forward. 
They all jump and through the jump Taylor’s hand is holding Thomas’s. Some one screamed Thomas name and then someone cursed. Taylor just screamed so loud the whole way down. 
As the group is running through the last city they are met up with, “Gally?”
Gally sees Taylor and chuckles, “hey Tay, its nice to-”
Taylor runs to him and punches his all over but Thomas pulls her away, “why are we with this guy? He’s a traitor! He killed Chuck!”
“I know Tay, I know. He’s on our side now. He saved us.” Thomas brings her back and tries to control her. 
“Also Gally was stung and out of his mind when he did that,” Newt said as he put a reassuring arm around her. 
Taylor still feels like she wants to kill Gally, “how the hel* did you survive anyways?”
“I was saved, treated and now I’m helping you guys. Like I said, its nice to see you again Tay.”
“Yeah well I wish I could say the same thing.” Taylor answers back sassy. “What happened here?” 
Explosives go off, there is fire and terror every where. People are screaming, violent. Its like the end of the world it seems to Taylor’s eyes. 
 Then Taylor hears harsh breathing coming from Newt. “Newt?”
Newt sends Minho and Gally away, also wanting Taylor to go. “No, I’m not going anywhere. Thomas, whats wrong with him?” 
Thomas looks down, sad and Taylor’s heart almost drops. “No he can’t no.”
“I do Tay. I have it.” Newt says in an almost reassuring voice. His lips turning black like if they were goop. Alarming Taylor and Thomas that they need to figure out something quick. As Newt is struggling he hands Thomas a silver pendant. Taylor and Thomas assist Newt in walking to a safer place and they end up to an empty area where Newt passes out. 
All of a sudden Teresa’s voice is heard through out the whole city. She explains that Thomas, with his blood, can save Newt if he comes back to WCKD.
Thomas has tears in his eyes and so does Taylor but Newt stands up. Awkwardly like he isn’t himself. 
“Newt?” Thomas says, trying to sound gentle. 
Taylor’s heart was going so fast. She felt that she already knew but she didn’t want to believe it. “Newt, we’re here buddy. We are here for you, shank.”
Newt turns around and Taylor already knew, he had become one of them. Newt looks directly at Thomas, “Newt.”
Saliva coming out of Newt’s mouth and looking like a total different...thing, he charges towards Thomas. Thomas pushes him away making him fall on the floor but he gets back up. 
“Newt its me, its me!” Thomas tries to tell Newt but Newt is not the same person anymore. 
“Newt we wont hurt you!” Taylor tries to get into his head. She pulls Newt away from Thomas throwing him on the floor. Newt tackles Thomas and with the forces of Taylor’s strength and Thomas’s they roll him away. Newt gets up and jumps on Taylor and almost bites her. “Thomas help! Newt stop please! Its me, Taylor!” She is screaming as his mouth is almost a few spaces away from her face. Thomas kicks Newt and Newt falls on his back on the floor. Thomas helps Taylor stand and as they get up Newt utters for them to kill him. 
Newt, again tackles Thomas and Taylor tries to get him off but Newt is too strong. As Thomas utter his name Newt stops. “I’m sorry Tommy, I’m sorry Tommy.”
“Its okay, its okay,” Thomas smiles at Newt. Newt then grabs Thomas’s gun and tries to shoot himself in the head. Taylor quickly grabs the gun away from him. “No!”
Newt grabs his knife and tries to stab Thomas. Thomas struggles to keep the blade from intruding his chest so Taylor puts her hands on the blade to stop him. Her hands are getting cut, slicing through soft skin. Taylor winces at the pain and notices blood dripping from her hands on Thomas’s shirt. The shirt soaking up the crimson liquid. “Please Newt stop.” Taylor pushes Newt off with Thomas punching him in the face. 
As Newt and Thomas fight, Newt trying to stab Thomas they meet up together. Taylor hears the knife slicing through and starts to cry. It didn’t matter who it stabbed, it wasn’t like she cared more for one and not the other. She cared for both of them so much. “Newt, Thomas...” She muttered as she started to sob. 
They hold on more to each other and as they part the knife went into Newt’s chest. “No! No! There has to be so way, please no, please!” Taylor is panicking at this moment, she is uncontrollably sobbing. Her heart breaking more as if that were possible. “No Newt, not my Newt.” 
“Tommy...” Newt whispers, as himself. He falls down but Thomas catches him so his fall would be less painful. “Tay...”
Taylor was right beside him, holding his hands and looking into his eyes. Brushing his honey golden strands back. 
Taylor then remembers the things her and Newt did. Its like a whole book she thinks of. She spent so many years with him she felt not herself. She remembers when they would garden together. Newt would pretend that the carrots were his teeth and do funny faces with them. Taylor would throw dirt on him and say if he were to grow into a flower, he would be the most beautiful flower out there. Whenever Taylor would feel sad or sick, Newt was there for her. Cuddling with her, taking care of her, worrying about her. All those times worrying, when she wanted him to have a great life. Whenever Taylor felt self conscious Newt would always say, “don’t think about those bloody thoughts love, to me you are perfectly splendid in every way.” Then he would end it off with his charming smile. One time Taylor drew a portrait of himself, resting against the tree, so peaceful. Newt smiled and was shocked, calling Taylor the most creative person in the world. “You got my good side also,” he would chuckle with a wink. The most fondest memory Taylor has of her and Newt is that they both would rest and lay upon the tall blades of grass. Laying next to each other but Newt was laying up and Taylor was laying down. Their heads were next to each other. Taylor would sing to Newt, making Newt feel at peace. He always liked her singing. Then would it would come of night Taylor would read the stars and tell him, “I see big things, for the both of us. Our lives will change Newt, you’ll see.” Then she would ask Newt, “if we did make it out of here Newt...where would you go?” Newt would take a while and Taylor would smile, “I’d love to go to the ocean, full of water and...stuff. Who knows?” Newt would look directly into Taylor’s eyes and nod, “I would go anywhere, as long as its with you.” Taylor would grin and give him a huge bear hug. “Don’t worry shank, we’ll get there. We’ll always get there and when we do, we’ll do it Newt, together.”
Taylor cried as she looked at Newt’s dying form. She collected herself and looked directly into his eyes, clasping him hand and running her finger through his hair. As the wind howls low in the night Taylor breathes in and out, (this song is called rainbow by kacey musgraves)  “Oh tie up your bow, take off your coat and take a look around ” She starts singing, knowing Newt would love to hear the peaceful melody. His breathing starts to relax and he smiles, looking directly into her ocean blue eyes. He can’t utter a word but Taylor knows what he would say, “thats bloody good mate” or “wow Tay, to hear that come out of you is amazing, its like everything is possible.” 
“Tay..” Thomas whispers, tears coming out more. The lyrics mean something so important to Taylor. Thomas nods and knows Newt, no, Newt deserves to go away peacefully. 
“Everything is alright now” Taylor sings to him telling him he can let go, he can go now that they will be alright and he does not have to suffer or worry no more. 
The lyrics mean to Taylor so much. This song is for Winston, Jessica...Chuck. All those who passed away for fighting for something they believed in. 
“'Cause the sky is finally open, the rain and wind stopped blowin' But you're stuck out in the same old storm again” Taylor means as she makes up the lyrics as she goes that the sky is opening to welcome Newt, so Newt can see his friends Newt can see Winsont, Jessica, and Chuck. He can play with them and tell them jokes and use his beautiful accent. Taylor starts to shed some more tears knowing she’ll never get to hear Newt say her name again, she’ll never hear his little comments about anything any more. She struggles to sing the other lines but she does it knowing they are important to Newt. 
“Let go of your umbrella, darlin' I'm just tryin' to tell ya That there's always been a rainbow hangin' over your head Yeah there's always been a rainbow hangin' over your head” The umbrella means for Newt to let go, thats its okay for Newt to die. But the rainbow part means that his friends his family were always there for him and they will always be there for him and that they will always remember him. Then he’ll get to see so many rainbows where he’s going, he’ll get to play with them and be himself. 
As Newt gives his last breath Taylor sings the last part, “It all be alright” Newt dies with his eyes open and Taylor closes them and kisses his cheek. “We’re gonna miss you Newt. Have fun my darling Newt...” Taylor and Thomas hug as they sob together. Brenda arrives but she is too late. 
Tumblr media
Thomas and Taylor go to WCKD and confront Ava. She keeps insisting that their ways are good. She is then killed by Janson who is infected. As Janson knocks Thomas out Taylor runs away and hides, following them. He takes Thomas to a lab where Teresa is ready to extract his blood. Janson tells though that he and WCKD are only truly interested in curing those whom they please, which results in Teresa turning on him. 
Thomas and Janson fight, making Taylor follow them. Teresa sees Taylor and they look at each other knowing they have to save Thomas. They are all stuck in one room together. Thomas sees that Janson shot him in the gut. Taylor goes to Thomas and kisses his forehead telling him, “we’re gonna help.” Her and Teresa come up with a plan to distract Janson. As Teresa takes charge of the plan and Taylor goes to Thomas to help him out, Janson almost kills Teresa but Taylor and Thomas throw a chair into a lane of glass, releasing two turned workers. Those things kill Janson and with Taylor and Teresa assisting Thomas make it to the rooftop. The aircraft by Jorge and Vince await them there. Thomas helps Taylor get on board first and then Thomas leaving Teresa last. Teresa is about to get on with Taylor’s help as the building collapses, “no!” Taylor and Thomas scream as Taylor tries to grasp Teresa’s hand. Teresa falls to her death. 
Tumblr media
The group reunites with the immune and the right arm. They arrive at a safe haven that was revealed by Ava. Its where the rest of the population can live safely. 
That night as Taylor sits by the ocean she feels a paper in her pocket. “What in the world?” She takes it out and unfold it revealing to be the picture that Taylor drew of Newt. “He kept it all this time?” Taylor whispered to herself as tears started to come out. She sees her drawing and as she turns it over she sees that Newt drew her a picture, its of them laying in the tall green grass, smiling and holding hands There is a note there and it says, “To my beautiful friend, you have made my life the best, you have made me feel nothing else but joy. For that I want you to live your life, go anywhere and start your adventures. Remember how I said I would go anywhere with you, well its still true. Wherever you are at this moment, I am there with you, you may not see it but its true. So have fun my beautiful Tay, thank you for having my back and for making me feel like I can do anything. You deserve all the best, I am so proud of you Taylor. Also, you were always my rainbow hanging over my head.” Taylor kissed the letter and dried her tears. “Thank you Newt,” she whispers as the waves crash lightly in the sand and the sun begins to go down.
Taylor goes to where they are carving the names of those who they lost and she pats Minho’s shoulder as he carves out Newt’s name. Taylor kisses her fingers and pats his name, she does the same when she sees Chuck’s and Winston’s name. She grabs the carving tools herself and carves out Jessica’s name, smiling when she finishes it. 
Taylor goes to the group of the others and hugs them, hugging Minho, Frypan, Brenda, even Gally. “I wanted to say, thank you for all that you have done, Gally. I forgive you.” She pats Gally and Gally thanks her. “And I know Chuck forgives you as well.” Taylor says as she smiles. She takes her seat next to Brenda and Thomas arrives hugging everyone. Thomas sits next to Taylor and Taylor grabs his hand kissing it. Thomas smiles and kisses her on the lips. 
Tumblr media
He then kisses her forehead and whispers, “I love you so much Tay.”
Taylor chuckles and laces her fingers with his, “I love you more...my Thomas.”
Tumblr media
20 Years from that
“Mommy, mommy, c’mon lets go see the fishies,” Taylor’s son called out to Taylor as she ran to him. Standing by the ocean was her husband, Thomas smiling. The others were there as well, there kids present. 
“Wait up Newt! Mommy can’t go that fast!” Taylor chuckled as she ran to grasp her son’s hand and then her husbands. As they walk in the sunset the breeze is nice and cool and Taylor places a hand on her stomach, “I can’t wait to see you soon Chuck, mommy’s excited.” Thomas kisses his son and kisses her stomach and her forehead. “Daddy’s excited too, c’mon lets go see the ocean, I think there’s also a rainbow there.”
Taylor smiles and her family, the family that means everything to her, they walk away going on with more discoveries and more loving adventures. 
Tumblr media
Tag list: @harrington-lover, @angelgl16, @perfectlybeautifulsuit, @hyehoney, @wtfisalltherandoms, @haven-prelude (wont let me tag), @leasly, @totally-alexa21, @creamy-pasta-boi, @multireese, @fanfictionrecommendations-com, @prentisskelley, @malereaderforkpop (wont let me tag), @guardian-of-cookies, @justafangirl-97, @teenageshitposts (wont let me tag), @andreaoreas, @dippergravity (wont let me tag), @some-booty, @fromfoolishpeopletodeadpeople, @collectiveyou
wanna be tagged in my crap? comment!
31 notes · View notes
Text
Our trip to Ghana (part 2)
Tumblr media
Keta
This village town is about two hours drive East of Accra. It's got great views of the Volta River, it's got its own lagoon and is close to the sea so a great place for water lovers. We came here to stay in the holiday home of my mum's friend's brother-in-law. His place was really nice, large rooms with en-suite, a swimming pool and plenty of things to do in the river like canoeing, paddle boarding, jet skiing. It was the first place that I have ever kayaked, and the place where Hannah got terrible sunburn in her legs but it was fun.
We drove far east of Ghana and were almost an hour away from the capital of the next country. During the journey back we stopped over at our first slave trade fort, Prinzenstein one owned by the Danes. It was in pretty bad condition considering more than half of it was washed away by the sea, but there was enough of it left for us to get an idea of what went on. Our tour guide told showed us where the women used to bathe, where they slept, and where they were sold. We saw a model of the full fort which looked large. Unfortunately, the upstairs was too dangerous for us to walk on but that's where the generals quarters would have been.
Cape coast
Tumblr media
Our time in Accra and Keta was fun and although we enjoyed the tourist attractions we seemed to be the only ones around. That was all about to change when we entered the former capital of Ghana. Cape Coast is a place booming with tourists attractions as well as local and international tourists.
Cape Coast castle
Tumblr media
The first of two castles we visited at Cape Coast and I would say the first proper museum we visited in Ghana not because it was large and had loads of tourists in it (we were unfortunate to have a large group of schoolgirls in front of us), but because of the information that was provided. There were books and pamphlets in the ticket hall, a gift shop, and the self-guided tour section had loads of pictures and text to go along with it. There was a section that replicated the inside of a slave ship and another that replicated the ring where slaves would be sold. It was impressive and added to the effect of the area's sad history.
The castle itself was very well built and was better preserved than the one in Keta. Originally built by the Swiss for trading slaves it was taken over by the British who did the same thing. We saw the dungeons where the male and female slaves were kept. Our tour guide was very good and simulating what it felt like to be down there by giving us detailed descriptions while turning off all electric lights as there wouldn't have been any in those times. The floors which were originally brick were caked with a layer of hard grey which was years of human [faeces] and dirt which was a surprise to me, as well as the bad sanitation that was in the dungeons.
We saw a prison that was used for both slaves and misbehaving officers which was built in an interesting way. The first section had a door with holes where the white soldiers were kept for a day. The second section behind the first had a much thicker door which no holes and it lead to a place which no ventilation whatsoever. This is where the misbehaving slaves were kept and were left there until they died. We walked along the edge of the castle closest to the sea which had loads of cannons, these were used to fend off invading pirates and attacking countries. Each castle had a fort nearby built on a hill so a lookout could spot the enemy from afar. Unfortunately, we didn't have time to visit any forts in Cape Coast but we might do that on a future trip.
We then walked up to the place where the governors would stay which was a drastic difference to the dungeons. They had large rooms with plenty of windows, there were kitchens and bathrooms. Many of those rooms had been modified and were being used as offices. I know Osu castle (which we didn't visit) has been completely taken over by those in government and used as offices.
Cape Coast castle was such a great tourist attraction and I recommend it for anyone visiting Ghana.
Elmina castle
Tumblr media
This castle is a similar size to Cape Coast castle but was originally built for a different purpose. This was the first castle built in Africa around 1400 by the Portuguese to share the gospel and for fair trade. They traded gold for things like mirrors, guns, gunpowder and so on. However, when Columbus discovered the Caribbean islands and the riches it contained, they realised they needed people to work on them, for various reasons they decided to take the people from Ghana to those islands and the castle changed from a place of goods trade to a place of the slave trade.
I don't want to go too much into the history of what happened but I will say once again our tour guide did a very good job of explaining it to us and showing us around.  We started in a church at the centre of the castle, then moved to the storage places which later became the dungeons for slaves. There were loads of similarities between this place and Cape Coast castle. The conditions in which the slaves were kept in was worse than animals. Misbehaving officers were kept in a prison with air and light for a day whereas misbehaving/revolting slaves were kept in a much worse prison and left to die. We saw a ball and chain in the courtyard of the women which was used to torture the slaves who refused to sleep with the generals that requested them. It was all very moving, especially seeing the gate of no return, the place where the slaves would leave to go on boats.
This castle, unlike Cape Coast, showed clear signs of a takeover. The Portuguese lost it to the Dutch who had reinforced it after destroying parts of it and built their own protestant church as opposed the Catholic Portuguese one and built their own kitchen.
I think it's amazing how much of the castle was preserved in the condition that it was. This castle, in particular, was around 600 year old and rooms were still being used as offices and gift shops.
Kakum National Park
Tumblr media
Our final tourist attraction in Cape Coast was the Kakum National Park. I had heard a lot about this place before visiting Ghana, the famous canopy walkway that was so high up people were so afraid to set foot on it. I spoke to someone at work who closed her eyes all the way across.  So upon entering the park I was pretty nervous, I didn't know what to expect.
Upon paying for our tickets we sat in the wooden waiting area and watched a documentary on the cape cost tourism board. A group of American students also came to the waiting area before our tour began.  Once again, we were touring with school kids. We let them go ahead of us as we toured through the rainforest.  We were told there were 240 elephants in Kakum, all sorts of snakes and birds, but unfortunately, we didn't see any of them, what we did see however were large ants, driver ants. Our tour guide told us not to step on them as their death would all an army of them to attack. Inevitably someone didn't listen and killed a few ants, we were told to run quickly across the path as not to get swarmed, so we did, this made the tour feel a bit rushed.
We got to the canopy which was really high up above the ground but it was incredibly well reinforced. The wooden walkway was on top of a metal ladder type structure placed horizontally. The walkway was walled with a thick rope mesh and there were ropes all around it to keep it from falling, this put my nerves at ease, this and the knowledge that since the park had been built no one has ever fallen through the walkway.
We walked through first and the Americans walked behind us. There were about 20 students overall which made the bride feel very wobbly but safe enough for us to take videos and pictures of it. We were on and off all 4 bridges in less than 15 minutes and I wanted to do the whole thing again.
Conclusion
Tumblr media
Although I wasn't a huge fan of the humid heat, the long long car journeys, and the mosquito bites I enjoyed my time in Ghana overall.
I really missed having Hausa Koko, Tom brown or Cerelac for breakfast with hard dough bread. The taste of fried plantain and beans, goat meat kebabs, grilled chicken with Jollof, Malta Guinness, and of course, Milo with evaporated milk. Fresh coconut juice, watermelons, sugar cane, pawpaws, and mangos were also great additions to my diet.
I enjoyed having conversations with family members I hadn't seen in a while and brushing up on my [Fante]. It was weird at first seeing billboard, adverts and TV shows with just black people on them, especially for brands that are in the UK as well like Vodafone and Barclays, but I got used to it after a while and it was actually sort of refreshing. It was also quite shocking to see loads people on the roads selling food, open shipping containers on dirt pavements with shops, and driving on bumpy dirt roads. A lot Ghana to my surprise looked very third world, even in Accra, the capital. I was shocked to see that at first, but like most things there I got used to it.
For those who have been swung by this article and really want to visit Ghana, I have a few tips for you. Make sure you keep the fan on when you sleep, it makes it harder for the mosquitos to bite you. Don't drink water from the taps or eat any vegetables. The water is safe to drink and eating vegetables that have been washed in said water isn't good either. Take a face towel with you or buy one when you're there, you'll sweat so much that it will be uncomfortable so the towel will be your best friend. Take money out of an ATM instead of a forex bureau, the exchange rates are usually better. And finally, be a generous tipper.
2 notes · View notes
teratoscope · 6 years
Text
Repton
The inside of the dome is a hothouse; your optics fog the moment you cut inside. The ground shifts and gives slightly under your feet. Nothing is paved here, except with what you’re guessing is piles of chipped rubber strewn across a concrete foundation. The whole place feels like you’ve wandered into a nightmare version of a playground; a hopeless tangle of brightly-painted metal and plastic, some entirely abstract and some molded in crude imitation of jungle foliage, weaves around and above you. Featureless black domes break up the terrain, some the size of houses. And then there’s the noise, the inescapable wall of sound this place throws at you. Synthetic insect chirring, the hiss and hum of climate regulators, a distant rumble of turbines and churning coolant somewhere far below, and a repetitive, ear-splitting whoop. Which, you’re realizing, is almost certainly an alarm. Your hosts are well camouflaged against the terrain; bright, many-colored scales gleam under the half-light that catches in the heady atmosphere like insects in amber. They dangle from bars and false branches, then drop to the ground and pace tight circles around you, watching the graphics flit across the inner surface of the dusky orange domes fused over their eyes. Some break formation to get a closer look, then flee back into the labyrinthine reaches above. “Are they supposed to be cute?” says Dak. Weapon racks pop loose from hidden chambers in the floor and out of “trees,” clattering into place. The Reptons rush them, squabbling for the prime pickings before some unseen force goads them to break away and take the next gun down. “You tell me,” you say.
HD 1 MV 180’ climb AC 14 AT bite (d4+1) or by weapon Special network
Network—all Reptons are networked to each other and their devices. Unless their comms are jammed, a Repton soldier always has a precise understanding of their distance relative to their squadmates and all Repton-aligned tech, and can communicate with both. Furthermore, all Reptons have access to their network’s algorithmic assistance. If the Reptons in question are in combat with a target that has fought networked Reptons before, they gain +1 to attack and initiative rolls for every one of these prior encounters (up to 6).
1d6 Repton Weapons
1.     Lance caster. 3d3 kinetic, 90’ range, six-shot clip. Semi-automatic magnetic bolt-thrower. Individual bolts are about as long as a human forearm, brightly colored to stand out for easy recovery and reload. Reptons struggle with tracking ammunition in high-tension situations, and also with aiming; lance casters tend to be assigned to top-percentile fighters.
2.     Buddy gun. 1d4+3 heat, 240’ range, battery exhausts and needs to be re-cranked for 1d3 rounds on a max-damage roll. Onboard AI provides procedurally generated moral support. Weapon of choice for the average Repton grunt.
3.     Bughucker. Xd10 explosive, 400’ range, can house and fire up to three shells at once, dealing damage equal to shells fired. Launches a suicide drone resembling an overfed beetle that chases its target using impenetrable precognitive algorithms. The damage from a successful attack roll with a Bughucker “arrives” 2d3 rounds after the round is actually fired. It takes 1 round to arm and load a shell. The definition of a fire-and-forget weapon.
4.     Mega-cuffs. 2d6 kinetic, melee weapon. Allows an extra 60’ rocket-assisted charge in a straight line as part of an attack. Fuel explodes for 3d6 damage in a 15’ radius on a critical miss (Dex check for half for everyone but the Repton wearing it).
5.     Rad-hoser. 30’ cone, 2d4 Rads (Dex check for half). Sprays goopy, luminescent reactor discharge. Widely used to clear ground for development.
6.     Slough cannon. 60’ cone, 1d8+1 damage from abrasion and hemorrhaging (Con check for half). Damage die implodes each round: roll damage at the top of the round and apply if the damage is less than the damage dealt last round; otherwise the effect ends. Deals no damage to targets in airtight armor. Weapon reaches dangerous operating temperatures; on firing the wielder takes 1d3 heat damage. Fires an expanding cloud of nanoassemblers designed to revert living tissue to uncommitted stem cells and package it for future use.
1d8 Repton Devices
1.     Black cylinder the size of a coffee maker held aloft on a dirty yellow repulsor field. Synthesized voice squawks instructions in decidedly un-reptilian but still unrecognizable language in time with strobes of decorative light piping. Neural-network assisted targeting means that each consecutive missed shot grants a +1 to the next attack made by any Repton. AC 8, hp 12, MV 90’ hover
2.     Modular railgun. Takes three dedicated team members and a full round to assemble, aim & fire, hucks anything that fits in the barrel and can hold a charge for 10d10 kinetic damage in a 600’ straight line (Dex check to dodge). All pieces emblazoned with thorough visual aids that walk the user through the assembly process.
3.     Egg-shaped plastic housing the size of a football with a set of neural interface leads coiled around a magnetic support stand. When wired up, user enters a hypnagogic state for six hours, after which leads detach and user wakes with no memory of their state of unconsciousness. For the subsequent 48 hours, user has instantaneous and entirely subconscious grasp of Repton engineering, will service Repton devices without noticing if their hands are not kept otherwise occupied. Reptons will ignore anyone who sticks close to one of these things, and actively assist a user. Continuous use risks permanent nerve damage.
4.     Short brass rod ending in t-shaped prong. So long as it remains aimed at a single biological target, the target’s sensory faculties are greatly reduced (disadvantage to all tests of perception), and pain, fatigue, and sickness register only as a faint, pleasurable itch (so long as effect is sustained, player has no knowledge of their hit point total and is immune to penalties from distraction/pain/morale).
5.     Repton-sized metal pylon ringed with sturdy levers. Interface panel shows map of local terrain and best-fit route from current location to resource-rich zone. Requires a team of ten Reptons (or three to four reasonably strong humans) to open, revealing opalescent, filigreed structure, like a fossil basket star curled around a flickering, barely perceptible mote of solid black. Upon release, computronium seed begins to unfold and put down roots. Surrounding six-mile radius will become a fully functional and populated Repton habitat within a month.
6.     Amoeboid drone; flexile smart-matter body around hard-framed central storage armatures. Absorbs wounded Reptons and deposits them in “care spheres” where internal limbs mend/foam over wounds and dose the patient with combat amphetamines. One round to recover an incapacitated Repton, 2d3 rounds to redeploy with a rerolled hit die and +4 to hit and damage. MV 120’, AC 10, hp 14.
7.     Mobile terrarium. Looks like a Rainforest Café stapled to the back of a mechanical crab. Reptons stationed in one never flee; they defend their home to the death. “Trees” extrude clone mealworm paste and simulation fruit flesh in narcotic, mildly hallucinogenic, and blue raspberry flavors. Guided by competent but nonverbal AI. Personalities tend to be grudgingly servile to overseers, pleasantly exasperated with crew in a way that should be familiar to any cat owner. MV 90’, AC 16, hp 80
8.     Meta-Rover. Modular all-terrain vehicle, top operable combat speed of 300’/round. Like a pile of motorized, armored bigwheels bolted together into a single day-glo abomination, until it separates into a swarm of single-seaters. Vehicles can hypothetically link indefinitely, but for every unit after the 6th there’s a 1 in 10 chance at the end of each round that the drivers fall catastrophically out of sync and the assemblage spins out.
The Reptons were the first species we encountered in the Contact War, and if it had only ever been them, things might have been different.
The average individual Repton is about as canny as an especially dull chimp in most regards. They’re reasonably talented tool-users, but if you were to raise one from the egg, away from their infrastructure, their at-birth implants, and mainline Repton culture, it would take some serious goading to get them to so much as flint-knap.
And yet as a group, Reptons are deadly. They fight tactically, often making unexpected gambits, and they fight with little regard for their individual well-being. They communicate constantly, though no-one has yet been able to decipher Repton script or spoken language; Repton “writing” features six thousand plus distinct characters and counting and doesn’t seem to have any fixed direction you’re supposed to read it. And their war effort is driven by arms and manufacturing tech that is sometimes leagues ahead of what humanity is capable of, or founded on utterly inscrutable scientific principles, even if the interfaces often seem designed for preschoolers.
But nobody has a clear, substantiated explanation for how they wound up with their tech in the first place. A camp in Freestar One’s strategic research division theorizes that they are the leftovers of a species that lost its evolutionary pressures towards sapience; another argues that they are an uplifted species whose patrons abandoned them, died out, or supervise them from a distance. Stranger explanations exist.
What is known is that their computers are frighteningly powerful and all of their machines talk to each other. Their industrial society is kept afloat purely by the power of their algorithms and the constant influx of resources provided by their ongoing conquest of the planet—the Reptons themselves are merely the hands that authorize and facilitate the intricate automatic processes of invention and fabrication that build their domed cities, develop their food, medicine, entertainment, and weapons, grow and indoctrinate their children, and schedule their lives.
They are vestigial components in a vast machine with no capacity to recognize itself or any part within, operating on the sprawling organic logic of a dream instantiated by engineers lost to time.
Anyone who’s been deployed in Repton territory can attest to the uncanny atmosphere they carry with them. No individual part of a Repton crew behaves like a person. But there is something that emerges in the interplay, as they fumble with their devices and their devices fumble with them, that suggests an intellect inherent to neither. If you watch them from the right distance—not too far, not too close—they resolve into something distressingly like us.
15 notes · View notes
isakthedragon · 7 years
Text
Super Sonic Thieves Chapter 3
Chapter 3- The Case of Thieves and ‘Killers’
Intro Cutscene:
Sly: “Another look into the Thievius Raccoonus led us to visit England during the Victorian Era. Our family had an ancestor during that time, Thaddeus WInslow Cooper III, that was known as one of the richest families at the time. Besides being known as a wondrous mechanic, building one of the earliest flying machines, he was also a well-known detective from Scotland Yard as well.  There was something very worrisome about it though; not only is that information missing, but it seems he was arrested for committing attempted murder he was investigating! Looks like we’ll have to put on our thinking caps and grab the magnifying glasses to solve what has happened to my ancestor.”
Sly Cooper and the Gang in…
*An old timey book opens up to an empty page and a raccoon hand comes in with a red-inked quill and writes: ‘ The Case Of Thieves and ‘Killers’ ’. The ink slides down off the letters a bit, looking like blood.*
-----
Hub Layout:
The gang has their hideout just outside of London to the West in an abandoned farm (so they can hide the van since they don’t exist yet) during the winter, so not many people are outside as well, along with a covering of snow everywhere. The police department, and the jail as well, are in the center of the city, just West of the River Thames. Nearby is Big Ben, chiming on the hours. Since this is the 1800s, the city is much smaller, and is more filled with houses. The map ends on the River Thames though, so you can’t go any farther. The north side of London is the home of a huge manor and in the air is one of Eggman’s airships floating about, creating all the badniks.
Enemies
Crows: Black crows that flutter about the roofs in search of thieves, or anyone breaking the law for that matter. They will caw for other guards if provoked. Carries/drops 5-7 coins to pickpocket has 10% chance of treasure.
‘Werewolves’: Wolves that walk around, patrolling the streets with their heightened sense of smell for blood (Wolves in Sly’s world are anthropomorphic already, but they are ‘werewolves’ for being more fluffy and having longer claws, seemingly being transformed by the London moon.) They will counterattack with their claws with a nasty claw swipe that is almost unavoidable. Carries/drops 7-9 coins to pickpocket has 25% chance of treasure.
Horses: Brown-colored stallions that search the streets with their flashlights for anyone where they aren’t. Attacking these guys will make them retaliate with a hoof kick, but it does take them a bit to charge up. Despite what you’d think, it’s best to stay real close in front of their face if there is no alert about as they can’t see in front of their own head for a few feet. Carries/drops 7-12 coins to pickpocket has 50% chance of treasure.
Bobbie Pawns: Egg Pawns acting as the actual police force of London, but will club at anyone with their oversized clubs and will whistle for other enemies if left alone. Don’t attack their head as their have a spike on their cap that is NOT for show and WILL hurt. Drops 6 rings when smashed.
Egg Fighter Knights: Also wearing a police uniform, these guys opt for a sword and shield instead (But forgot their spike caps). Either hit them from the top or from the back to destroy them. Drops 8 rings when smashed.
Egg Gunners: Eggman’s blatant disregard for time has had him send his futuristic (And humanoid looking) badniks to fight Sonic and co. They can float in the air and fire at you with their vulcan cannons. Sonic and the others can handle them, but the Sly characters may need to get creative to smash these things. Drops 10 rings when smashed.
Nebula: Helicopter like badniks that drop spike balls on you if you pass underneath them. Better destroy them before that happens. Drops 4 rings.
Balkiry: Fast bird baniks that jet towards you. Better smash them when you see them. Drops 5 rings.
Turtloid: A small turtle badnik that controls a bigger turtle badnik that fires small missiles at you. Destroy the smaller one to make the bigger one useless. Drops 6 rings.
Treasures:
From Guards:
Bronze Quill: Worth 40 coins and 20 rings.
Silver Quill: Worth 60 coins and 30 rings.
Gold Quill: Worth 80 coins and 40 rings.
From Pedestals:
Pearl Necklace: No bobby trap. Worth 400 coins and 200 rings. Found around Annis Fox's home. 
Gold Crown: Bomb booby trap, with 2:00 timer. Worth 450 coins and 225 rings. Found near the courthouse.
Silver Clock Hands: Bomb bobby trap, with 1:00 timer. Worth 500 coins and 250 rings. Found on Big Ben’s roof.
Golden Magnifying Glass: Fall Damage Sensor booby trap. Worth 600 coins and 300 rings. Found near Thaddeus’s home
The coins here have an old Victorian England Coat of Arms on them.
Secret Sighting of Clockwerk: Acting as a gargoyle statue in a park. Maybe he’s a Weeping Angel? :P
-----Jobs-----
Another London ‘Murder’ Mystery
Find a disguise for Sly
Go talk to Thaddeus
Steal the case info
Head off to the manor and take recon.
Sly: “It feels weird that I am going to a police station voluntary again.”
Carmelita, through the radio: “Giving you bad memories? Preferably in shocks!” *She chuckles.*
Sly: “Huh, so that’s why my tail has a tingling sensation near you.” *He chuckles back.*
Bentley: “GUYS! PAY ATTENTION!!”
Sly: “Buzzkill.”
Carmelita: “Indeed.”
Bentley: “We don’t got time! We need to hurry in and find Thaddeus! His trial is tomorrow, and we need to figure out to save him before then, but first we need to talk to him!”
Sly: “Alright, Bentley, don’t get your shell cracked. We’ll talk to him, although I wonder if they might arrest me for looking like him…”
Espio: “Don’t worry, I’ll distract them, but perhaps you might need a disguise…”
Bentley: “I would guess the evidence locker for clothes might have something you can use. Now come on!”
*Sly and Espio head into the Police Station. The player has them sneak around, avoiding and distracting police officers with various things to get their attention as they make their way to the evidence locker where they store clothes. There are waypoints in the room for things to collect.*
Sly: “Alright.” *He puts them on.* “Heh, should fool them enough. Now to find Thaddeus.”
*The player continues sneaking on, making their way to Thaddeus’ cell. Once there…*
Thaddeus was sitting, looking away from the bars. “Huh? Who goes there? Another annoying bobby making fun of a ‘lost’ detective?”
Sly: “Quite the opposite really. I want to help restore your reputation.”
It peaked Thaddeus’s interest, with his ears twitching and tilting his head a bit. “Oh, really? And who might you be?”
Sly: “Well, it’s a long story, but I am an ancestor of yours. My name is Sly Cooper.”
Thaddeus turns and walks up to the bars to look at Sly. “Hmmm… it appears you are a Cooper alright. But what are you doing here?”
Sly: “Well, it seems obvious you aren’t meant to be in prison. I know you are a great detective, but someone has altered history to put you in here.
Thaddeus: “Is that so? How? And why? You didn’t have something to do with this, did you?”
Sly: No! ...Well, I hope. Anyway, I’m afraid I can’t explain right now. Can’t risk overstaying my welcome here. But what can you tell about what’s going on. How’d you get arrested?
Thaddeus: “Ah, it is the most infuriating thing! I was framed for attempting to murder Lady Fox, a fox of extraordinary wealth.”
Sly: “WHAT?!”
Thaddeus: “Yes! Even though I’ve never been nor had any reason to ever visit her place, the law found my items in her living room where she laid comatose, and her own valuables were missing! Being from a family of master thieves, I was of course accused of the crime despite none of those valuables being in my possession.”
Sly: Blamed for a thieving you didn’t even commit. Unbelievable…
Thaddeus: Oh, I shudder to think of how tarnished my legacy has become with this unfortunate event...
Sly: Hey, don’t worry! Me and my gang are going to do everything we can to clear your name! I’m not going to let one of my favorite ancestors go down like this!
Thaddeus: A thousand thank yous, my dear descendant. I bet if you want to know anymore of the case, they probably have the information handy, since my trial, which is gonna be more of a death sentence than anything, is soon.”
Sly: “We’ll figure out some way-”
Espio interjects quickly. “Someone’s coming! And we can’t hide you!”
Sly: “Don’t worry, I got this.”
Police Officer: “Hey?! Who are you? What are you doing here?”
Sly (In his favorite accent, Italian :P ): “Oh? A-me? I’m-a the defense lawyer sent to defend Thaddeus. It’s-a my first case.”
Police Officer: “Hah! I see they found a sucker to defend Thaddeus! No one wants to touch that! Good luck, buddy, his case is a lock! Better be prepared to lose!” *The thought was apparently funny enough that the officer leaves.*
Espio: “That was close.”
Sly: “Guess I’m gonna defend you then, Thaddeus.”
Thaddeus: “Knowing you’re doing it, I feel relieved. I wish you luck.”
Sly: “Thanks.”
*The player now makes their way back out, taking the case info someone left out along the way.*
*Outside…*
Bentley: “So you had to tangle yourself with the case huh?”
Sly: “Well, someone has to defend Thaddeus! Besides, it might help with whatever plan we come up with later.”
Bentley: “True. Well, I guess you should make your way to the manor then. See what the crime scene suggests.”
*The player heads off to the manor and in disguise, enters it. They make their way to the master bedroom, where the crime occurred.*
Sly: “Hmmm… quite a mess in here…”
*The player takes recon photos of the broken window, hole in the wall, the neat bed, and the trail of loot leading out of the open empty safe.*
Bentley, on the broken window. “It seems to be where the criminal entered, considering the glass on the inside floor.”
Bentley, on the hole in the wall. “That shape seems quite odd. Maybe we need to ask Sonic and his friends on that.”
Bentley, on the neat bed. “Hmmm, for the mess in the room, the bed looks oddly neat. This Ms. Fox must have been put to sleep before she could even react.”
Bentley, on the trail of loot. “Whoever did this seems to have dropped a money trail, literally. I think we should check where it goes.”
Sly: “That seems to be everything interesting we can find here.”
Bentley: “Alright, come back to the hideout so we can read the case info and we’ll go on from there.”
JOB COMPLETE
-----
Bentley: “Alright. Here seems to be their case for the prosecution: Yesterday morning, nearby neighbors awoke to the sound of glass breaking from the manor. Worried for Ms. Fox, they immediately went to get the police. They came quick and found her comatose on the bed and her safe open and completely empty of money and valuables. Finding what was a calling card for Thaddeus, they immediately arrested him and took his cane along with them. Oddly, the cane is missing from the evidence log, so it can be assumed it was lost on the way to the station. They threw him in jail, and now it’s just waiting for the case to finish to kill him.”
Vector: “Seems like they have a really good case against him, especially with the calling card.”
Charmy: ♪ “Heh, maybe we should take it back so they have no case!” ♫
Bentley: “That’s what we were thinking. We need to steal it so they will have a harder time prosecuting him. And it might also free Thaddeus for the time being.”
Charmy: ♪ “Sweet! So who gets to go?” ♫
Bentley: “We’re gonna have Espio and Carmelita go in to find the evidence. It’s too dangerous for anyone else.”
Charmy: ♪ “AW! I wanted a mission!” ♫
Bentley: “Don’t worry, you got a mission with Vector. You guys will follow the money trail to see where it ends.”
Charmy: ♪ “YAY!” ♫
Vector: “We won’t let you down!”
-----
Follow the Green
Follow the trail of money to its end
Vector: “Alright, we’re under the broken window that the trail of cash leads to, but it seems the snow is covering more it.”
Bentley: “Darn, I see the snowfall has been heavy recently. How are we going to find it?”
Charmy: ♪ “OH! Oh! Vector can find it! He can find the trail, no problem!” ♫
Bentley: “Really? How?”
Vector: “Heh, well, I have somewhat of a sense of money. I can smell it from a distance.”
Bentley: “Great! Go on, then! Follow the trail!”
Vector: “Got it.”
*The player has to hold down a certain button to make Vector sniff the ground, which makes green clouds float above the ground, showing the money trail. The player has Vector and Charmy follow it among the streets, alleys, and roofs throughout town, until they reach Big Ben.*
Charmy notices them stop. “What is it?”
Vector: “For some reason, the trail stops here in front of Big Ben. It might continue, but we can’t get up there.”
Bentley: “It’s alright, guys. Come back to the safehouse. We’ll find a way up there.”
JOB COMPLETE
-----
Freeing the Innocent
Enter the evidence locker and steal back the evidence leading to Thaddeus
Save Carmelita from the police officers.
Carmelita, wearing a period accurate police uniform stolen earlier by Sly. “I wonder if they will believe me in this get-up.”
Espio: “Well, I just need you to convince them long enough so I can get through the evidence locker for Thaddeus’ stuff.”
Carmelita: “Hmmm, if they are like present day evidence holding rooms, it should be alphabetized. So look under ‘C’ .”
Espio: “Got it.”
*The player enters and takes control of Espio as Carmelita grabs the attention of the police around. The player makes their way to the evidence locker and enters it.*
Espio: “Oh my!”
Bentley: “What is it?”
Espio: “For being the 1800s, the place sure has modern-day lasers.”
Bentley: “Hmmm… I wonder if Eggman has messed around in here?”
Espio: “Well, it’s not going to stop me. I got this.”
*The player makes their way through the evidence locker, avoiding the lasers and other modern-day traps to reach Thaddeus’ evidence, which Espio grabs.*
Espio: “Alright. Time to get out of here.”
Bentley: “You better hurry. Carmelita seems to be having trouble keeping up out there. She sounds mad.”
Espio: “Got it.”
*The player now has to make their way out, noticing Carmelita is overwhelmed. The player has Espio make some noises and distractions to help Carmelita escape. Once it works, they leave to finish the mission.*
JOB COMPLETE
-----
Bentley: “Alright. I got good news and bad news.”
Sly: “I’m guessing the good news is Thaddeus is now free from jail?”
Bentley: “Yes.”
Sonic: “That seemed too easy.”
Bentley: “Well, that’s the bad news.”
Thaddeus: “Apparently, someone claims they saw me putting Ms. Fox to sleep and stealing her money, and they are testifying in court tomorrow. I’m free to move around the city, but I can’t leave.”
Charmy: ♪ “Darn! All that for nothing!” ♫
Thaddeus: “Well, I’m here now, and I want to help you find the real criminal!”
Sly: “So what are our plans on doing that?”
Bentley: “Well, Silver and I will be entering Big Ben to continue on the trail of the money. I have a feeling it will lead us to who did all this. Also during this time, Murray and Vector will check on Ms. Fox.”
Vector: “I think what has made her comatose is an Egg Flapper badnik. The hole in the wall matches up to one.”
Bentley: “Besides, she could be useful in solving the case. Finally, Thaddeus, Sly, and Sonic are going to take Thaddeus’ plane into the air. I think that airship is producing all the badniks down here and it might make our plan harder if we don’t take it down.”
Sonic: “Sweet! Some air time!”
Sly: “Huh, flying with my ancestor. Never thought I’d see the day.”
-----
Going Cuckoo
Make your way through Big Ben
Steal the cane back from Bark the Polar Bear
Tails: “I can see you guys are at Big Ben. Now how to help you guys get up on the roofs.”
Bentley: “Hmmm… nothing seems obvious…”
Silver: “Can I try something?”
*The player has Silver telekinetically grab Bentley…*
Bentley: “WHOA!”
*... And place him on the roof nearby before telekinetically floating Silver there too.*
Tails: “Well, that worked.”
Bentley: “I flew! But please warn me next time you do that!”
Silver: “Heh, sorry, and alright.”
*The player makes their way across the roofs of Big Ben tower, following the money trail as it takes them into the belfry's. It’s a bit of a dangerous trek, avoiding various swinging parts and for some reason, lasers again and being spun around on gears and destroying junk and walls with Bentley’s bombs. The money trail ends at an ajar door that they enter. Inside they find the vault contents and something more…*
Silver: “Look! The money!”
Bentley: “Shhh… that’s not all.”
*We pan to see Bark the Polar Bear sitting in a lounge chair, talking to Eggman.*
Bark: “Well, it’s a bit unconventional, but I’m going to be testifying to get Thaddeus executed.”
Eggman: “I can only guess that pesky hedgehog is the reason why you have to.”
Bark: “Sorry.”
Eggman:”It’s fine. I’m used to failure. Just make sure your case is solid!”
Bark: “It is, I promise! It can’t be disproven otherwise!”
Eggman: “You better hope so!”
Bark: “Well, if it’s any consolation, I have the info for Thaddeus’ cane and moves and stuff.”
Eggman: “Good. Send it over.”
Silver: “I think I can grab the cane, but we need to distract Bark first.”
Bentley: “I think if I hit the various bells and stuff above him, it should annoy him enough! I’ll use my darts to work them.”
*The player has Bentley shoot darts at various gears and bells, making them work to make a big cacophony that makes Bark cover his ears.*
Bark: “AH!!! The noise! So deafening!”
*The player has Silver take the distraction and telekinetically get the cane over to Silver.*
SIlver grabs them once they are close. “YES! I got them!”
Bentley: “Let’s get out of here before he notices.”
JOB COMPLETE
-----
Grey’s Robo-Anatomy
Defeat the enemies in the hospital
Save Carmelita’s ancestor from the Egg Flapper
Vector: “Alright, Tails. We have made it to the hospital… although it looks quiet.”
Murray: “Too quiet. The hospital looks dark.”
Tails: “That doesn’t sound good. You guys better check it out and find out what’s happening.”
*They enter and find the place swarming with badniks and guards chasing the hospital staff.*
Tails: “Oh my! They seems to be attacking the staff and patients! You guys better stop them before anyone gets hurt!”
*The player goes on a protection mission, finding hospital staff and protecting them from the badniks and guards.*
*Once everyone is saved:*
Vector “Alrighty, we saved everyone.”
Murray: “But still no sign of Ms Fox.”
Tails: “Hmmm… I’m seeing a strange mechanical reading from one of the rooms that’s covering up someone’s signature. I’ll put a waypoint. See what’s in there.”
*The player goes to find the waypoint and enters the room to find…*
Murray: “ *GASP* Sly’s not going to believe this, but it appears Ms. Fox is actually Carmelita’s ancestor!”
Vector points out the badnik next to her. “Looks like she’s being held asleep by that Egg Flapper!”
*The robot wises up and flies out of the room.*
Vector: “After that badnik!”
*The player know has to chase after the Egg Flapper, throwing things at it to make it crash onto the ground so it can be attacked. Once destroyed, the player returns to Ms. Fox’s room to find her slowly awaking.*
Ms. Fox: “Oooh… what happened… feels like I’m drunk…���
Vector: “Hello, Ms. Fox. You were in a comatose state, but we found a way to wake you again.”
Annis Fox: “Mmm… please, call me Annis. And thanks. But why was I in one, and why am I in a hospital.”
Murray: “We can explain, but it might be safer to do it someplace else.”
Vector: “Is that alright, Ms?”
Annis: “Mmm, anything better than this hospital seems good at the moment.”
JOB COMPLETE
-----
Robots in the Sky with Coopers
Survive the flying badniks
Take down the airship
Thaddeus: “Ah, home sweet home. I was worried I wouldn’t make it back.”
Sonic: “Why have you taken us here again?”
Thaddeus: “I’m your way of getting into the sky!” *The doors to the shed open, revealing a plane belonging to Thaddeus.*
Sly: “Wow! I saw it in the Cooper Vault, but seeing it here makes it look that much more awesome!”
Thaddeus: “It should work, but this will be my first time flying it, so I’d like apologize if things go south.”
Sonic: “Heh, it wouldn’t be my first crash landing.”
Sly: “Mine neither.”
Thaddeus: “Good. Your friend Bentley seemed adamant on taking out those robots flying up there. I guess you guys can balance on the wings to attack them. I’ll do my best to keep steady.”
*The trio get on the plane and Thaddeus takes off. The camera goes to 2D as a level like Sky Chase Zone starts.*
*The player is zoomed on forward, attacking badniks as they pass by. Sly is useful for close combat while Sonic can hit the more distant (floaty) badniks more safely.*
*Once that is all done, the airship closes in on them and cannon shells whiz by.*
Sly: “WHOA! What was that?”
Sonic: “Cannon shells. Eggman always outfits his airships with cannons. We better get off and destroy that airship as we are still close.”
Thaddeus: “I’ll distract them, but please hurry and destroy them first! I can’t save you guys otherwise!”
*Sly and Sonic jump off. The player now has them destroy the cannons on top of the ship then go into the interior and destroy the computers and other guidance systems to force the airship to crash. The player must then get out and get onto Thaddeus’ plane.*
*Getting on will let a cutscene play of the airship crashing into the River Thames.*
Sonic: “You keep building them and we keep knocking them down, Eggman!”
Sly: “Guess I can check that off on things our gang has destroyed. Let’s go return to Bentley with the news.”
JOB COMPLETE
-----
Bentley: “Alright, Thaddeus’ trial is today and we need to get him found innocent. I got… no plan.” *He sounded sad.*
Sly: “Well, I am acting as Thaddeus’ defense attorney. (In his Italian accent.) “I shall-a find-a my client not-a guilty!”
Bentley can be heard slapping his face. “We’re doomed.”
Sly: “The only thing I need to do is just convince the judge Thaddeus didn’t do it by countering Bark’s testimony. Is there evidence I can use?”
Charmy: ♪ “Well, we do have the money trail leading out of the manor and to Bark and the valuables!” ♫
Sly: “That’s a good start, but I worry they might think I planted it then.”
Vector: “Well then, how about Ms. Fox’s testimony.”
Sly: “Sure, that would- wait, what?!” *He notices Annis.* “Carmelita?!”
Annis: “No, I’m Annis. I was told already and she knows about me being her ancestor around this time.”
Sly: “I… I see.”
Carmelita: “Don’t get any ideas, Cooper!”
Sly: “I’m not! I’m still surprised to see an ancestor of yours.”
Bentley: “I’ve made some calculations. Using her will most certainly free Thaddeus and implicate Bark! But we have to make sure she can survive a trip to the courthouse.”
Carmelita: “Blaze and I will do it. We’ll get her there safe. Just don’t mess it up Sly.”
Sly: “Heh, knowing I’m at the end of that barrel will keep me from messing up.”
-----
Operation Turnabout
Get Sly and Thaddeus to the courtroom
Protect Annis Fox
Stall the Courtroom
Defeat Bark
*The player controls Sly and Thaddeus, helping them make their way to the courthouse. But thanks to a heavy guard presence along the ground since the airship crashed, the duo have to stay among the rooftops to avoid being shot at.*
Sly: “We need to make it to the courthouse in one piece.”
Thaddeus: “Being eviscerated is for court.”
*Once they get there, the camera returns to the safehouse, everyone leaving ahead save for Carmelita, Annis, and Blaze*
Bentley: “We’ll scout ahead to make a path, but you guys will have to deal with any stragglers.”
Carmelita: “I’ll make sure they don’t lay a hand on my ancestor at all.”
Blaze: “I’ll make sure of that.”
*The player now has to escort Annis to the courtroom, taking down any guards and badniks along the way. Annis is not much of a fighter, but can dodge somewhat. Just make sure to not let any enemy get close to her and you’ll be fine. Once at the courthouse, they immediately enter...*
*The Judge snaps his gavel to quiet the gallery.*
Judge (He’s an owl): “Order, people! The attempted murder trial of Ms. Annis Fox is to begin now. Is the defense ready?”
Sly: “As-a ready as we can-a be, ‘Udgy!”
Judge: “And the prosecution, Mr ‘Wolf?”
Prosecutor Edge-Were-Wolf: “Despite some setbacks, yes.”
Judge: “Setbacks?”
Prosecution: “Someone… stole some evidence…”
Judge: “But that means there’s no case from what I read.”
Sly: “Then-a my client should-a go free!”
Prosecution: “HOLD IT! We may not have evidence, but we have the next best thing! Testimony from someone who witnessed the crime and certainly put Thaddeus as the killer!”
*The gallery murmurs.*
Judge: “Then bring him out! We got executions and cases to get to!”
Prosecution: “The prosecution calls Bark the Polar Bear to the stand.”
Sly whispers to Thaddeus: “Alright, you ready?”
Thaddeus: “I am used to this, but are you?”
Sly: “Yeah, if it means I save you.”
--
*Bark takes the stand*
Judge: “Please state your name and occupation for the court. Not that it matters.”
Bark (Having a British accent): “My name’s Bark and I’m Annis’ butler. I know what I saw when I walked in! Thaddeus was there!”
-WItness Testimony-
Bark: “I had finished my work for the day and left, but I forgot something and went back in. There, I saw Annis’ bedroom in ruin and Lady Fox on the bed motionless. And I saw Thaddeus, that very raccoon, pilfering her most treasured items with an evil grin!”
--
Judge: “Well, that seems to wrap this case up quite nicely! Be the quickest conviction ever! I find Thaddeus-”
Sly interrupted: “OB-JECTION, ‘Udgy, but did-a you forget I’m here to counter?!”
Judge: “Why should you?! Seems pretty open and shut, honestly.”
Sly: “I can find some-a holes, trust-a me.”
Judge: “Fine, but don’t waste our time.”
-Counter Argument (The player decides if Sly presses, objects, moves on, or moves back a statement with dialogue trees from Sly 3. Wrong objections empty the penalty bar, doing it twice gets a guilty verdict and must start over from the beginning.)-
Bark: “I had finished my work for the day and left, but I forgot something and went back in.”
Sly- Do I press him for more info, object to the statement with evidence, or move on to a new statement?
-*If Press is chosen: (CORRECT OPTION)*
Sly: “HOLD IT! What is it you forgot-a to do that required returning back to the manor bedroom?”
Prosecutor: “OBJECTION! Does it really matter?”
Sly: “I-a think so! It might be-a important!”
Judge: “I’ll allow it. Witness?”
Bark laughs nervously: “I… uh… forgot to lock the safe.”
Prosecutor: “WHAT?! You didn’t tell me that?!”
Bark: “It didn’t seem relevant… you’d have to be a part of her staff to even know if the safe was locked.”
Sly: “See! I-a told you it was important!”
Prosecutor: “Ob… Objection! As he said, it’s not relevant totally”
Sly: “Is it? The crime occurred-a when the safe was-a unlocked! Smells of an inside job if you ask-a me!””
Judge: “I have to side with the Defense. Witness, amend your testimony.”
Bark: “I had stupidly forgotten to lock the safe.”
Sly: “Do I press him for more info, object to the statement with evidence, move on, or go back a statement?
*If Sly presses*
Sly: “Hold it! Why did you forget to lock the safe?”
Bark: “I was… busy… Annis had pushed me around a lot that day. It slipped my mind.”
Prosecutor: “I don’t see a problem here, honestly.”
Sly: *Is there?*
YES (Incorrect)-
Sly: “I… I think?”
Judge: “Allow me to decide: No!”
Sly: “D’oh!”
NO (Correct)-
Sly: *Mmm, he is right… if I was busy, I could forget something important.* “Fine, move on.”
Bark: “There, I saw Annis’ bedroom in ruin and Lady Fox on the bed motionless”
*If pressed*
Sly: “Hold it! How did you know the bedroom was in ruin?!”
Bark: “Well, the safe was ajar and the bed was a mess, like with a struggle!”
Prosecutor: “Is there a point?”
YES (Correct)
Sly: “Yes! I took a photo of the scene and found the bed to be neat and tidy, as though she never got out of bed in the first place!” *Shows a period accurate picture of the bedroom for the court.*
Bark: “Oh… darn...”
Prosecution: “Damn it…”
Judge: “The witness will refrain from lying on the stand.”
Bark: “Sorry… I just forgot…”
NO (Incorrect, but just does nothing, as it requires a revisit)
Sly: “No… not that I can see…”
Judge: “Please continue.”
Bark: “And I saw Thaddeus, that very raccoon, pilfering her most treasured items with an evil grin!””
*If pressed.*
Sly: “Hold it! How do you know it was Thaddeus?”
Bark: “It was him for sure! I saw his cane!”
*The prosecutor slaps his face.* “Damn it!”
Judge: “HUH?! Why the outburst, Prosecution?”
The prosecution seethes. “That… was the missing evidence.”
Sly: “Perhaps we can-a help?”
Prosecutor and Judge: “What?!”
Sly: “We found the cane.” *He shows it to the court.*
Judge accepts it as evidence. “Where was it?”
Sly: “Well, it might-a not help the prosecution. But we found it in Bark’s possession. He-a dropped it.”
Bark starts to look worried.
Sly: “And while we are-a on the subject, I think the police should-a visit Big Ben! We did some detective work and found a money trail leading for Annis’ home to his secret hideout in Big Ben. And we found the lost valuables!”
Bark now looks angry.
The judge is surprised. “You found the money and valuables?!”
Sly: “Yeah, and Bark’s testimony seems to neglect the hole in the manor wall and the glass on the inside of the window on top of the hole!”
Judge: “How about you tell us your theory, Defense.”
Sly: “I-a think Bark doesn’t work-a for Annis, and was actually planning on-a robbing her! He-a knocked her out beforehand with one of-a those weird things flying around outside, creating the hole and making her comatose!”
Judge: “So weird things outside belong to him?”
Sly: “Yes! Then he crashed in-a through the window and then robbed her of-a her stuff, leaving a trail to-a his place! Thaddeus is wrongly implicated here!”
The prosecutor smiles: “And can you prove this?”
*A voice can be heard in Sly’s ear at this time.*
Bentley: “Sly! We’re here! We can hear you! Finish it off!”
Sly: “Yes!”
The prosecutor loses his smile fast. “Wait, what?”
Sly: “Why-a don’t you ask Annis Fox yourself?!”
Judge: “But she’s comatose!”
Sly: “We-a found a way to revive her! Just ask her! I call Annis Fox to the stand!”
*The court doors open and Annis walks in.*
The prosecutor: “A-a-a-a ANNIS FOX?!”
Bark: “Damn it…”
Annis: “I heard the defense, and he is right! I believe I saw a bear outside a few times beforehand, and Bark looks just like him! I feel confident that he robbed me!”
The prosecution is speechless.
Judge: “I guess that wraps this up nicely. I find Thaddeus -”
Bark: “NOOOOOOOO!!!!!!!”
-*If Object is chosen at a wrong time.*
Sly: “I-a Ob-ject!”
Prosecutor: “On what grounds? Even a fool could tell nothing is wrong there!”
Judge: “Sorry, but I’m with the prosecution. Penalty for the defence”
Sly: “D’oh!”
-*If penalty bar is empty*
Judge: “I’m sorry, but I must stop the defense from making a fool of himself. I find Thaddeus: G U I L T Y.”
Sly: “Sorry Thaddeus…”
--
*In a fit of anger from losing, Bark pulls out a button switch*
Sly: “What’s that?”
Bark: “I WILL NOT LOSE TO YOU FOOLS!!! DIE!!!!”
*He presses the button, and sounds can be heard outside…*
Sly: “Everyone! Get out now!”
*One of the crashed airship’s last cannons, still operational apparently, aims itself at the courthouse and fires a powerful shot. Everyone scrambles to get out of the courtroom before the shot collides. Once the shot hits, the roof collapses and the debris wreck the courtroom with only Carmelita and Knuckles remaining inside, the rest of the team unable to get back in due to the debris blocking them.*
Knuckles: “Ugh… Oh thank the heavens, we’re alive.”
Carmelita: “Urk, yeah… Unfortunately, we’re alone with him now.”
Bark: “Dammit! How did that not kill anyone?! No matter! I’ll take you both down and then kill that brood like I was supposed to!”
Carmelita: “HA! Good luck with that! I’ll have you know I’m Interpol’s top detective and I’ve taken down criminals far stronger than you! And if you think I’ll let you kill my ancestor this easily, you’re very mistaken!”
Knuckles: “Yeah! And my strength easily outmatches yours! You have no chance, Polar Bear!”
Bark: “We’ll see about that, you echidna lastling!”
*Carmelita fires an electric blast from her Shock Pistol at Bark. Right when the shot was about to hit Bark, it disappears and the polar bear is not affected*
Carmelita: “What the-?!”
Bark: “Hehehe, my boss prepared for your arrival and gave me a device to activate an Electric Shield! It protects me from electricity and gives me a shocking punch!”
*Carmelita growls and jumps at Bark, intending to deliver a powerful kick to his head, but he catches her foot and tosses her into one of the rubble*
*And so the boss fight against Bark begins. Thanks to his Electric Shield, Bark is completely invulnerable to Carmelita’s shots. Thankfully the Electric Shield will disappear should Bark suffer a powerful enough hit but he is tough as bricks, so only Knuckles can do anything about this. The first part of the fight has Knuckles and Bark duking it out like boxers. In other words, this part of the fight plays like a simplified fighting game; the controls have you punch, block, dodge, and move, with the objective being to deplete the Electric Shield’s “HP” to zero. Once it’s gone, you can switch to Carmelita and start unloading her Shock Pistol at Bark and whittle away at his health. Once his health goes down 25%, Bark will bring up another Electric Shield and the process begins again. While fighting against Knuckles, he’ll start off with just punching, then jabbing quickly (75%), throwing uppercuts (50%), and finally fake-outs (25%). And while fighting against Carmelita, he hide more often and throw stuff at you the more health he loses.
*Once Bark is defeated*
Bark: “I may have lost… but Eggman is still winning…”
-----
Outro Cutscene:
Sly: “After knocking out Bark, the court deemed Thaddeus as not guilty for the crime and arrested that polar bear on the spot. For both the crime and destroying the courthouse, Bark was to be sentenced to death! But we couldn’t let that happen, both to keep the timestream stable and because we can’t allow anyone from Sonic’s universe to die in our world, so we managed to convince the law to let us apprehend Bark and then toss him back into Sonic’s world. After having to solve that whole mystery, we all decided to stick around with Thaddeus for a bit and get some downtime. With the way Eggman and his goons operated so far, we need all the energy we can get. Besides, with time travel, it’s never too late to do anything.
Sly: “Heh, Thaddius sure is spending quite a bit of time with Annis, talking about cases and the like. Guess he must of convinced the Fox family to go into law enforcement.”
Next Time: Sly and Sonic batten down the hatches in the 17th Century Caribbean.
2 notes · View notes
bigyack-com · 5 years
Text
Crowds disturbing your peace? Here are 5 hikes to explore at Yosemite National Park, California - travel
Tumblr media
Dappled sunlight kisses the valley floor of Yosemite National Park. Granite monoliths, gushing waterfalls and giant sequoias abound. The wilderness is calling.But instead of hitting the trails in a place John Muir called “by far the grandest of all the special temples of nature,” you’re sitting in a traffic jam, vying for limited parking.More than 4 million visitors poured into Yosemite in 2018, and because its main attractions are concentrated along a 7-mile loop, it gets congested. Like, 5 p.m. in downtown Los Angeles congested. Parking can take hours.“In general, national parks everywhere, they become more and more popular every year, and a place like Yosemite, you can’t just show up unprepared,” says James Kaiser, author of Yosemite: The Complete Guide. “It feels like a huge disappointment visiting a place to experience natural beauty and spending your time looking for a parking space.”But there’s no reason anyone’s trip to the majestic park should be so fraught. Going any other time than summer, planning valley activities on any day but Saturday, getting an early morning start and choosing lesser-known trails can all help ensure a peaceful and restorative vacation. The following hikes aren’t as famous as Half Dome or the Mist Trail, but that’s the point. They offer just as much beauty and a lot more serenity.1. North DomeLike most of the recommended hikes on this list, this 8.8-mile roundtrip trek is off Tioga Road just north of the valley. Everything outside the actual valley automatically will be less busy, but the views are no less stunning. The last quarter of the hike offers a front-row view of Half Dome and the valley floor below, and without the crowds.“The view of Half Dome is so unlike any other view in the park,” Kaiser says. “Half Dome is such an iconic site in Yosemite — to be able to enjoy it from North Dome I really think is special.”To get to the trailhead, take Tioga Road to Porcupine Creek, about 28 miles east of Crane Flat and 21 miles west of Tuolumne Meadows. It’s easy to miss, so keep your eyes peeled for a small building with pit toilets and parking spaces in a row on the south side of the road. After parking, look for a wooden sign that says, “Porcupine Creek Trail Head.” Below that you’ll see it’s 4.4 miles to North Dome.The first few miles of the trail are easy, quiet and heavily forested. Don’t be surprised if you see deer or even a black bear (don’t worry, they’re more afraid of you than the other way around). The views start opening up after 3 miles, but the highlight of the hike is hoofing it to the top of North Dome, scurrying a bit farther down the other side and drinking in views of Half Dome.Climbing the actual dome can be challenging but isn’t dangerous unless you like to court peril by walking too close to the edge. Hikers who tackle the dome should be generally fit or highly motivated.Temperatures can vary wildly from the bottom of the dome to the top, where there’s nothing to block the wind. Bring layers, 2 liters of water and snacks. Even better, bring a lunch and restore your energy on top of the dome. On the way back, check out Indian Rock Arch, the only granite arch in Yosemite and just a .6-mile detour.2. Dog Lake and Lembert DomeAnother conquerable dome in Yosemite is quicker to get to from its trailhead than North Dome. Lembert Dome looms over Tioga Road, jutting so seemingly straight up, it looks doable only with rock-climbing gear. All it really takes is a smidgen of bravery.The well-marked trail to Lembert Dome is next to Tuolumne Meadows, just 10 minutes from the eastern exit of the park. It’s a haul if you’re staying in the valley or the towns south of the park, so consider combining the hike with other smaller jaunts to May Lake (2.8 miles roundtrip off Tioga Road) and Tuolumne Grove (see below).Start the loop trail by going clockwise and head first to Dog Lake. You’ll pass the junction for Lembert Dome at the .8-mile mark. Stay straight and go another .3 miles to the lake. Take a few photos before moving on, or walk around the entire lake and explore more.To get to the base of Lembert Dome, retrace your steps back .3 miles from the lake to the Lembert Dome junction and take a left. The trail will lead you gradually up for about a mile and a half. From there, go as far as you feel comfortable.Some parts of the dome are too steep for some people’s comfort levels and may have you scooching back down on your bottom.The reward for continuing on up: 360-degree views of Tuolumne Meadows and mountains, and, of course, a sense of accomplishment.3. Gaylor LakesUnless you’re a regular hiker accustomed to elevation, this 3-miler will make you huff and puff. The trailhead, just a stone’s throw from Yosemite’s eastern entrance, starts at an elevation of nearly 10,000 feet. Plus the beginning of the hike is up, up and more up, a steeper climb than say, Lembert Dome.But the pain is relatively short-lived and the payoff big: two beautiful alpine lakes. After climbing 600 feet for just over half a mile, the trail evens out before dropping down to Middle Gaylor Lake. Explore the area before heading northeast a short hop to Upper Gaylor Lake. Follow the trail to the north side of the lake, turn around, and drink in the views of both sparkling bodies of water before continuing up to the Great Sierra Mine historic site and trail’s end.Given its eastern location, this could be a great last hike before exiting the park, and is easily combined with a visit to Mono Lake and its otherworldly tufa formations. In the fall, nearby June Lake in the Eastern Sierra has deciduous trees awash in golds, oranges and reds.4. Tuolumne GroveSure, Mariposa Grove gets all the love. It’s a quick and easy stop just inside the park’s south entrance. But that means more crowds. For a little more peace with your giant sequoia gazing, head to Tuolumne Grove. This westernmost destination off Tioga Road is simple to get to from the valley, and there’s a decent-size parking lot.The 2.5-mile roundtrip hike is a riot of color in the fall. The trip down is a breeze and includes a couple dozen giant sequoias, including one you can walk through. The way back up can be a workout, 400 feet of elevation gain.5. Taft Point and Sentinel DomeThese hikes are off Glacier Point Road, and again are only doable from roughly June to October because of snow. But because Glacier Point is so popular (the views are spectacular and require no hiking), Taft Point and Sentinel Dome get more traffic than the hikes along Tioga Road. Still, except at peak times, they offer plenty of serenity, particularly Taft.To get to the trailhead, drive up Glacier Point Road for about 13 miles until you see a parking lot and pit toilets on the left. At the trailhead, take a right and head toward Sentinel Dome, where a relatively easy climb will reward you with 360-degree views of the valley, including El Capitan and Half Dome.Then head back down to the trailhead and continue straight for roughly a mile of easy trail to reach Taft Point. It offers jaw-dropping views of El Capitan and may prove challenging for anyone afraid of heights. Unlike the other hikes on this list, Taft Point ends at a sheer drop-off, a 3,500-foot straight shot to the bottom. People have fallen to their deaths here, but as long as you maintain a comfortable distance between yourself and the edge, there’s nothing to fear.Look out for couples getting married; adventurous sorts jumping off the side and swinging from what has to be the longest tire swing in the world; or ``highlining,’’ which is basically extreme tight-rope walking.For similar views with even fewer people, Kaiser recommends hiking to nearby Dewey Point, a 7.5-mile loop trail also off Glacier Point Road. With a permit, you can stay overnight and take in the stars and sunrise. Tips to keep in mind: — Tioga and Glacier Point roads close in winter, from around mid-November through late May or early June. The ideal time to take them is fall and summer, though early starts in summer will provide a more serene experience.— Don’t expect to find food or water at the trailheads. Be grateful that most at least have pit toilets. Stock up on food before entering the park, as the valley has the only food options, and those are minimal and amount to dry sandwiches, sad salads and soulless pizza. Stock several gallons of water in the car.— Check out the National Park Service’s tips on how to handle potential encounters with black bears.— As with any serious hiking, have shoes built for that purpose. Traction on the domes is a must. A backpack with a 2- to 3-liter water pouch is recommended.— Don’t expect to have cell service. Do your research before you arrive, and either bring paper maps or a map app you can access on your phone without internet service.— The National Park Service runs a page for Yosemite’s current conditions, including road closures, water levels and trails. Check it before you travel.(This story has been published from a wire agency feed without modifications to the text. Only the headline has been changed.)Follow more stories on Facebook and Twitter Source link Read the full article
0 notes